add const qualifiers
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/trunk@52414 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
This commit is contained in:
parent
1fee6e2577
commit
328f5751e8
@ -42,17 +42,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the command identifier for the accelerator table entry.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCommand();
|
||||
int GetCommand() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the flags for the accelerator table entry.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFlags();
|
||||
int GetFlags() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the keycode for the accelerator table entry.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetKeyCode();
|
||||
int GetKeyCode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the accelerator entry parameters.
|
||||
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the accelerator table is valid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
@ -83,18 +83,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the animation associated with this control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxAnimation GetAnimation();
|
||||
wxAnimation GetAnimation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the inactive bitmap shown in this control when the;
|
||||
see SetInactiveBitmap() for more info.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap GetInactiveBitmap();
|
||||
wxBitmap GetInactiveBitmap() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the animation is being played.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPlaying();
|
||||
bool IsPlaying() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the animation from the given file and calls SetAnimation().
|
||||
@ -197,27 +197,27 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the delay for the i-th frame in milliseconds.
|
||||
If @c -1 is returned the frame is to be displayed forever.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDelay(unsigned int i);
|
||||
int GetDelay(unsigned int i) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the i-th frame as a wxImage.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage GetFrame(unsigned int i);
|
||||
wxImage GetFrame(unsigned int i) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of frames for this animation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetFrameCount();
|
||||
unsigned int GetFrameCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the size of the animation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetSize();
|
||||
wxSize GetSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if animation data is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from the given stream.
|
||||
|
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ public:
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetAppName().
|
||||
This function is new since wxWidgets version 2.9.0
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppDisplayName();
|
||||
wxString GetAppDisplayName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the application name.
|
||||
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAppDisplayName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppName();
|
||||
wxString GetAppName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the class name of the application. The class name may be used in a
|
||||
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClassName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetClassName();
|
||||
wxString GetClassName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application will exit when the top-level window is deleted,
|
||||
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see SetExitOnFrameDelete(), @ref overview_wxappshutdownoverview "wxApp
|
||||
shutdown overview"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetExitOnFrameDelete();
|
||||
bool GetExitOnFrameDelete() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the one and only global application object.
|
||||
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTopWindow()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetTopWindow();
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetTopWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the wxAppTraits object for the application.
|
||||
@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUseBestVisual()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUseBestVisual();
|
||||
bool GetUseBestVisual() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the user-readable vendor name. The difference between this string
|
||||
@ -171,12 +171,12 @@ public:
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetVendorName().
|
||||
This function is new since wxWidgets version 2.9.0
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVendorDisplayName();
|
||||
wxString GetVendorDisplayName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the application's vendor name.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVendorName();
|
||||
wxString GetVendorName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function simply invokes the given method @a func of the specified
|
||||
@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void HandleEvent(wxEvtHandler handler,
|
||||
wxEventFunction func,
|
||||
wxEvent& event);
|
||||
wxEvent& event) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application is active, i.e. if one of its windows is
|
||||
@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxTopLevelWindow::RequestUserAttention
|
||||
to do it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsActive();
|
||||
bool IsActive() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the main event loop is currently running, i.e. if the
|
||||
@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@param theme
|
||||
The name of the new theme or an absolute path to a gtkrc-theme-file
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetNativeTheme();
|
||||
bool SetNativeTheme(const wxStringamp;);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 'top' window. You can call this from within OnInit() to
|
||||
|
@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ public:
|
||||
to figure out, which desktop environment is running. The method
|
||||
returns an empty string otherwise and on all other platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxString GetDesktopEnvironment();
|
||||
virtual wxString GetDesktopEnvironment() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the wxStandardPaths object for the application.
|
||||
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the library was built as wxUniversal. Always returns
|
||||
@false for wxBase-only apps.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsUsingUniversalWidgets();
|
||||
bool IsUsingUniversalWidgets() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Shows the assert dialog with the specified message in GUI mode or just prints
|
||||
|
@ -173,14 +173,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a copy of this entry object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArchiveEntry* Clone();
|
||||
wxArchiveEntry* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The entry's timestamp.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetDateTime();
|
||||
void SetDateTime(const wxDateTime& dt);
|
||||
const void SetDateTime(const wxDateTime& dt);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -192,8 +192,8 @@ public:
|
||||
Similarly, setting a name with a trailing path separator sets IsDir().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
void SetName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
const void SetName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -201,14 +201,14 @@ public:
|
||||
The size of the entry's data in bytes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
off_t GetSize();
|
||||
void SetSize(off_t size);
|
||||
const void SetSize(off_t size);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the path format used internally within the archive to store
|
||||
filenames.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPathFormat GetInternalFormat();
|
||||
wxPathFormat GetInternalFormat() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the entry's filename in the internal format used within the
|
||||
@ -219,12 +219,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_wxarcbyname "Looking up an archive entry by name"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetInternalName();
|
||||
wxString GetInternalName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a numeric value unique to the entry within the archive.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
off_t GetOffset();
|
||||
off_t GetOffset() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ public:
|
||||
restore files, even if the archive contains no explicit directory entries.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDir();
|
||||
void SetIsDir(bool isDir = true);
|
||||
const void SetIsDir(bool isDir = true);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ public:
|
||||
True if the entry is a read-only file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly();
|
||||
void SetIsReadOnly(bool isReadOnly = true);
|
||||
const void SetIsReadOnly(bool isReadOnly = true);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ public:
|
||||
can be a complete filename rather than just an extension.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanHandle(const wxChar* protocol,
|
||||
wxStreamProtocolType type = wxSTREAM_PROTOCOL);
|
||||
wxStreamProtocolType type = wxSTREAM_PROTOCOL) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
A static member that finds a factory that can handle a given protocol, MIME
|
||||
@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ public:
|
||||
constructor, is wxConvLocal.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMBConv GetConv();
|
||||
void SetConv(wxMBConv& conv);
|
||||
const void SetConv(wxMBConv& conv);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -333,8 +333,8 @@ public:
|
||||
GetFirst()/GetNext() return a pointer to a factory or @NULL if no more
|
||||
are available. They do not give away ownership of the factory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static const wxArchiveClassFactory* GetFirst();
|
||||
const wxArchiveClassFactory* GetNext();
|
||||
static const wxArchiveClassFactory* GetFirst() const;
|
||||
const wxArchiveClassFactory* GetNext() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -343,13 +343,13 @@ public:
|
||||
wxZipEntry::GetInternalName.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetInternalName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the wxFileSystem protocol supported by this factory. Equivalent
|
||||
to wxString(*GetProtcols()).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetProtocol();
|
||||
wxString GetProtocol() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the protocols, MIME types or file extensions supported by this
|
||||
@ -357,13 +357,13 @@ public:
|
||||
ownership of the array or strings.
|
||||
For example, to list the file extensions a factory supports:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxChar* const* GetProtocols(wxStreamProtocolType type = wxSTREAM_PROTOCOL);
|
||||
const wxChar* const* GetProtocols(wxStreamProtocolType type = wxSTREAM_PROTOCOL) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Create a new wxArchiveEntry object of the
|
||||
appropriate type.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArchiveEntry* NewEntry();
|
||||
wxArchiveEntry* NewEntry() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -371,10 +371,10 @@ public:
|
||||
If the parent stream is passed as a pointer then the new archive stream
|
||||
takes ownership of it. If it is passed by reference then it does not.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArchiveInputStream* NewStream(wxInputStream& stream);
|
||||
wxArchiveOutputStream* NewStream(wxOutputStream& stream);
|
||||
wxArchiveInputStream* NewStream(wxInputStream* stream);
|
||||
wxArchiveOutputStream* NewStream(wxOutputStream* stream);
|
||||
wxArchiveInputStream* NewStream(wxInputStream& stream) const;
|
||||
const wxArchiveOutputStream* NewStream(wxOutputStream& stream) const;
|
||||
const wxArchiveInputStream* NewStream(wxInputStream* stream) const;
|
||||
const wxArchiveOutputStream* NewStream(wxOutputStream* stream) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns an entry object from the archive input stream, giving away
|
||||
ownership.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const T operator*();
|
||||
const T operator*() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of items in the array.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetCount();
|
||||
size_t GetCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Search the element in the array, starting from the beginning if
|
||||
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ public:
|
||||
See also @ref operatorindex() operator[] for the operator
|
||||
version.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString Item(size_t nIndex);
|
||||
wxString Item(size_t nIndex) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the last element of the array. Attempt to access the last element of
|
||||
@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Warning:
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns @true if the arrays have
|
||||
different number of elements or if the elements don't match pairwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator !=(const wxArrayString& array);
|
||||
bool operator !=(const wxArrayString& array) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator.
|
||||
@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Warning:
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns @true only if the arrays have
|
||||
the same number of elements and the same strings in the same order.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator ==(const wxArrayString& array);
|
||||
bool operator ==(const wxArrayString& array) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the array element at position @e nIndex. An assert failure will
|
||||
|
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the current art provider being used.
|
||||
See also: wxAuiDockArt.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxAuiDockArt* GetArtProvider();
|
||||
wxAuiDockArt* GetArtProvider() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current dock constraint values. See SetDockSizeConstraint() for
|
||||
@ -108,12 +108,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current manager's flags.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetFlags();
|
||||
unsigned int GetFlags() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the frame currently being managed by wxAuiManager.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetManagedWindow();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetManagedWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Calling this method will return the wxAuiManager for a given window. The @a
|
||||
@ -426,50 +426,50 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasBorder() returns @true if the pane displays a border.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBorder();
|
||||
bool HasBorder() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasCaption() returns @true if the pane displays a caption.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasCaption();
|
||||
bool HasCaption() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasCloseButton() returns @true if the pane displays a button to close the pane.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasCloseButton();
|
||||
bool HasCloseButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasFlag() returns @true if the the property specified by flag is active for the
|
||||
pane.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasFlag(unsigned int flag);
|
||||
bool HasFlag(unsigned int flag) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasGripper() returns @true if the pane displays a gripper.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasGripper();
|
||||
bool HasGripper() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasGripper() returns @true if the pane displays a gripper at the top.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasGripperTop();
|
||||
bool HasGripperTop() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasMaximizeButton() returns @true if the pane displays a button to maximize the
|
||||
pane.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasMaximizeButton();
|
||||
bool HasMaximizeButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasMinimizeButton() returns @true if the pane displays a button to minimize the
|
||||
pane.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasMinimizeButton();
|
||||
bool HasMinimizeButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasPinButton() returns @true if the pane displays a button to float the pane.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasPinButton();
|
||||
bool HasPinButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hide() indicates that a pane should be hidden.
|
||||
@ -480,73 +480,73 @@ public:
|
||||
IsBottomDockable() returns @true if the pane can be docked at the bottom of the
|
||||
managed frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsBottomDockable();
|
||||
bool IsBottomDockable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsDocked() returns @true if the pane is docked.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDocked();
|
||||
bool IsDocked() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsFixed() returns @true if the pane cannot be resized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFixed();
|
||||
bool IsFixed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsFloatable() returns @true if the pane can be undocked and displayed as a
|
||||
floating window.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFloatable();
|
||||
bool IsFloatable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsFloating() returns @true if the pane is floating.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFloating();
|
||||
bool IsFloating() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsLeftDockable() returns @true if the pane can be docked on the left of the
|
||||
managed frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsLeftDockable();
|
||||
bool IsLeftDockable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsMoveable() returns @true if the docked frame can be undocked or moved to
|
||||
another dock position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsMovable();
|
||||
bool IsMovable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsOk() returns @true if the wxAuiPaneInfo structure is valid. A pane structure
|
||||
is valid if it has an associated window.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsResizable() returns @true if the pane can be resized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsResizable();
|
||||
bool IsResizable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsRightDockable() returns @true if the pane can be docked on the right of the
|
||||
managed frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsRightDockable();
|
||||
bool IsRightDockable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsShown() returns @true if the pane is currently shown.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsShown();
|
||||
bool IsShown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsToolbar() returns @true if the pane contains a toolbar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsToolbar();
|
||||
bool IsToolbar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsTopDockable() returns @true if the pane can be docked at the top of the
|
||||
managed frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsTopDockable();
|
||||
bool IsTopDockable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Layer() determines the layer of the docked pane. The dock layer is similar to
|
||||
|
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the associated art provider.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxAuiTabArt* GetArtProvider();
|
||||
wxAuiTabArt* GetArtProvider() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the desired height of the notebook for the given page height. Use this
|
||||
@ -115,38 +115,38 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the page specified by the given index.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetPage(size_t page_idx);
|
||||
wxWindow* GetPage(size_t page_idx) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the tab bitmap for the page.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap GetPageBitmap(size_t page);
|
||||
wxBitmap GetPageBitmap(size_t page) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pages in the notebook.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetPageCount();
|
||||
size_t GetPageCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the page index for the specified window. If the window is not found in
|
||||
the notebook, wxNOT_FOUND is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPageIndex(wxWindow* page_wnd);
|
||||
int GetPageIndex(wxWindow* page_wnd) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the tab label for the page.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPageText(size_t page);
|
||||
wxString GetPageText(size_t page) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently selected page.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelection();
|
||||
int GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the height of the tab control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetTabCtrlHeight();
|
||||
int GetTabCtrlHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
InsertPage() is similar to AddPage, but allows the ability to specify the
|
||||
|
@ -70,17 +70,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the file extension associated with this handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetExtension();
|
||||
const wxString GetExtension() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the name of this handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetName();
|
||||
const wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the bitmap type associated with this handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetType();
|
||||
long GetType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads a bitmap from a file or resource, putting the resulting data into @e
|
||||
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Gets the colour depth of the bitmap. A value of 1 indicates a
|
||||
monochrome bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDepth();
|
||||
int GetDepth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the static list of bitmap format handlers.
|
||||
@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the height of the bitmap in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetHeight();
|
||||
int GetHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the associated mask (if any) which may have been loaded from a file
|
||||
@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMask(), wxMask
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMask* GetMask();
|
||||
wxMask* GetMask() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the associated palette (if any) which may have been loaded from a file
|
||||
@ -428,20 +428,20 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxPalette
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPalette* GetPalette();
|
||||
wxPalette* GetPalette() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a sub bitmap of the current one as long as the rect belongs entirely to
|
||||
the bitmap. This function preserves bit depth and mask information.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap GetSubBitmap(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
wxBitmap GetSubBitmap(const wxRect& rect) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width of the bitmap in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds the standard bitmap format handlers, which, depending on wxWidgets
|
||||
@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if bitmap data is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads a bitmap from a file or resource.
|
||||
|
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see SetBitmapDisabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapDisabled();
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmapDisabled();
|
||||
const wxBitmap& GetBitmapDisabled();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see SetBitmapFocus()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapFocus();
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmapFocus();
|
||||
const wxBitmap& GetBitmapFocus();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see SetBitmapHover()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapHover();
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmapHover();
|
||||
const wxBitmap& GetBitmapHover();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see SetBitmapLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapLabel();
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmapLabel();
|
||||
const wxBitmap& GetBitmapLabel();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBitmapSelected()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmapSelected();
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmapSelected() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the bitmap for the disabled button appearance.
|
||||
|
@ -143,12 +143,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns size of bitmaps used in the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetBitmapSize();
|
||||
wxSize GetBitmapSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the bitmap of the item with the given index.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap GetItemBitmap(unsigned int n);
|
||||
wxBitmap GetItemBitmap(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetColour()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets a pointer to the stipple bitmap. If the brush does not have a wxSTIPPLE
|
||||
@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStipple()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap* GetStipple();
|
||||
wxBitmap* GetStipple() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the brush style, one of:
|
||||
@ -250,21 +250,21 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStyle(), SetColour(), SetStipple()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStyle();
|
||||
int GetStyle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the style of the brush is any of hatched fills.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsHatch();
|
||||
bool IsHatch() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the brush is initialised. It will return @false if the default
|
||||
constructor has been used (for example, the brush is a member of a class, or
|
||||
@NULL has been assigned to it).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLabel()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLabel();
|
||||
wxString GetLabel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This sets the button to be the default item for the panel or dialog
|
||||
|
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@c EVT_CALENDAR_WEEKDAY_CLICKED handler. It doesn't make sense to call
|
||||
this function in other handlers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime::WeekDay GetWeekDay();
|
||||
wxDateTime::WeekDay GetWeekDay() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the week day carried by the event, normally only used by the library
|
||||
@ -70,59 +70,59 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the background colour to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour();
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the border to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCalendarDateBorder GetBorder();
|
||||
wxCalendarDateBorder GetBorder() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the border colour to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetBorderColour();
|
||||
const wxColour GetBorderColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the font to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the text colour to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour();
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this attribute specifies a non-default text background
|
||||
colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour();
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this attribute specifies a non-default (i.e. any) border.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBorder();
|
||||
bool HasBorder() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this attribute specifies a non-default border colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBorderColour();
|
||||
bool HasBorderColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this attribute specifies a non-default font.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasFont();
|
||||
bool HasFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this item has a non-default text foreground colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasTextColour();
|
||||
bool HasTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this attribute specifies that this item should be
|
||||
displayed as a holiday.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsHoliday();
|
||||
bool IsHoliday() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the text background colour to use.
|
||||
@ -270,54 +270,54 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the attribute for the given date (should be in the range 1...31).
|
||||
The returned pointer may be @NULL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCalendarDateAttr* GetAttr(size_t day);
|
||||
wxCalendarDateAttr* GetAttr(size_t day) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the currently selected date.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxDateTime GetDate();
|
||||
const wxDateTime GetDate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourBg();
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourFg();
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourBg();
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourFg();
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the background colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourBg();
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the foreground colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourFg();
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns one of @c wxCAL_HITTEST_XXX
|
||||
|
@ -69,8 +69,8 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( x, y )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetPosition(int* x, int* y);
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
void GetPosition(int* x, int* y) const;
|
||||
const wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetSize(int* width, int* height);
|
||||
wxSize GetSize();
|
||||
void GetSize(int* width, int* height) const;
|
||||
const wxSize GetSize() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the window the caret is associated with.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetWindow();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Same as wxCaret::Show(@false).
|
||||
@ -103,14 +103,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the caret was created successfully.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the caret is visible and @false if it is permanently
|
||||
hidden (if it is is blinking and not shown currently but will be after the
|
||||
next blink, this method still returns @true).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsVisible();
|
||||
bool IsVisible() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -106,14 +106,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Asserts when the function is used with a 2-state
|
||||
checkbox.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCheckBoxState Get3StateValue();
|
||||
wxCheckBoxState Get3StateValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the state of a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if it is checked, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetValue();
|
||||
bool GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the checkbox is a 3-state checkbox.
|
||||
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if this checkbox is a 3-state checkbox, @false if
|
||||
it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Is3State();
|
||||
bool Is3State() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the user can set the checkbox to the third state.
|
||||
@ -130,14 +130,14 @@ public:
|
||||
checkbox, @false if it can only be set programmatically
|
||||
or if it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Is3rdStateAllowedForUser();
|
||||
bool Is3rdStateAllowedForUser() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This is just a maybe more readable synonym for
|
||||
GetValue(): just as the latter, it returns
|
||||
@true if the checkbox is checked and @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsChecked();
|
||||
bool IsChecked() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the checkbox to the given state. This does not cause a
|
||||
|
@ -104,12 +104,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns array with indexes of selected items.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetSelection();
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets selected items from the array of selected items' indexes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelections(const wxArrayInt& selections);
|
||||
void SetSelections(const wxArrayInt& selections) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Shows the dialog, returning either wxID_OK or wxID_CANCEL.
|
||||
@ -222,22 +222,22 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of selected item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelection();
|
||||
int GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the client data associated with the selection.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
char* GetSelectionClientData();
|
||||
char* GetSelectionClientData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the selected string.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetStringSelection();
|
||||
wxString GetStringSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the index of the initially selected item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelection(int selection);
|
||||
void SetSelection(int selection) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Shows the dialog, returning either wxID_OK or wxID_CANCEL.
|
||||
|
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@remarks This is implemented for Motif only and always returns 1 for the
|
||||
other platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumns();
|
||||
int GetColumns() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Unlike wxControlWithItems::GetSelection which only
|
||||
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxControlWithItems::GetSelection itself behaved like
|
||||
this).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCurrentSelection();
|
||||
int GetCurrentSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the number of columns in this choice item.
|
||||
|
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the clipboard has been opened.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOpened();
|
||||
bool IsOpened() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if there is data which matches the data format of the given data
|
||||
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
||||
one.
|
||||
See @ref useprimary() UsePrimarySelection for more information.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsUsingPrimarySelection();
|
||||
bool IsUsingPrimarySelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Call this function to open the clipboard before calling SetData()
|
||||
|
@ -43,12 +43,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the untyped client data.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData();
|
||||
void* GetClientData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get a pointer to the client data object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject();
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the untyped client data.
|
||||
@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get string client data.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetData();
|
||||
const wxString GetData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set string client data.
|
||||
|
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently selected colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieve the colour the user has just selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the colour associated with the event.
|
||||
|
@ -196,22 +196,22 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if an option taking a date value was found and stores the
|
||||
value in the provided pointer (which should not be @NULL).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Found(const wxString& name);
|
||||
bool Found(const wxString& name, wxString* value);
|
||||
bool Found(const wxString& name, long* value);
|
||||
bool Found(const wxString& name, wxDateTime* value);
|
||||
bool Found(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
const bool Found(const wxString& name, wxString* value) const;
|
||||
const bool Found(const wxString& name, long* value) const;
|
||||
const bool Found(const wxString& name, wxDateTime* value) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the value of Nth parameter (as string only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetParam(size_t n = 0u);
|
||||
wxString GetParam(size_t n = 0u) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of parameters found. This function makes sense mostly if you
|
||||
had used @c wxCMD_LINE_PARAM_MULTIPLE flag.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetParamCount();
|
||||
size_t GetParamCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
After calling Parse() (and if it returned 0),
|
||||
|
@ -126,37 +126,37 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the list of commands.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxList GetCommands();
|
||||
wxList GetCommands() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the edit menu associated with the command processor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenu* GetEditMenu();
|
||||
wxMenu* GetEditMenu() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum number of commands that the command processor stores.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMaxCommands();
|
||||
int GetMaxCommands() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string that will be appended to the Redo menu item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetRedoAccelerator();
|
||||
const wxString GetRedoAccelerator() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string that will be shown for the redo menu item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetRedoMenuLabel();
|
||||
wxString GetRedoMenuLabel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string that will be appended to the Undo menu item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetUndoAccelerator();
|
||||
const wxString GetUndoAccelerator() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string that will be shown for the undo menu item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetUndoMenuLabel();
|
||||
wxString GetUndoMenuLabel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Initializes the command processor, setting the current command to the
|
||||
|
@ -183,74 +183,74 @@ public:
|
||||
as orientation)
|
||||
instead of showing a dialog. Windows only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetDefaultInfo();
|
||||
bool GetDefaultInfo() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the page setup dialog will take its minimum margin values from
|
||||
the currently
|
||||
selected printer properties. Windows only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetDefaultMinMargins();
|
||||
bool GetDefaultMinMargins() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the printer setup button is enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEnableHelp();
|
||||
bool GetEnableHelp() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the margin controls are enabled (Windows only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEnableMargins();
|
||||
bool GetEnableMargins() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the orientation control is enabled (Windows only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEnableOrientation();
|
||||
bool GetEnableOrientation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the paper size control is enabled (Windows only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEnablePaper();
|
||||
bool GetEnablePaper() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the printer setup button is enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEnablePrinter();
|
||||
bool GetEnablePrinter() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the right (x) and bottom (y) margins in millimetres.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetMarginBottomRight();
|
||||
wxPoint GetMarginBottomRight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the left (x) and top (y) margins in millimetres.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetMarginTopLeft();
|
||||
wxPoint GetMarginTopLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the right (x) and bottom (y) minimum margins the user can enter
|
||||
(Windows only). Units
|
||||
are in millimetres
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetMinMarginBottomRight();
|
||||
wxPoint GetMinMarginBottomRight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the left (x) and top (y) minimum margins the user can enter (Windows
|
||||
only). Units
|
||||
are in millimetres
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetMinMarginTopLeft();
|
||||
wxPoint GetMinMarginTopLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the paper id (stored in the internal wxPrintData object).
|
||||
For further information, see wxPrintData::SetPaperId.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPaperSize GetPaperId();
|
||||
wxPaperSize GetPaperId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the paper size in millimetres.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetPaperSize();
|
||||
wxSize GetPaperSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a reference to the @ref overview_wxprintdata "print data" associated
|
||||
@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This can return @false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
|
||||
On all other platforms, it returns @true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Pass @true if the dialog will simply return default printer information (such as
|
||||
@ -369,20 +369,20 @@ public:
|
||||
Has no meaning under other platforms.
|
||||
The default value is @true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetChooseFull();
|
||||
bool GetChooseFull() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current colour associated with the colour dialog.
|
||||
The default colour is black.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the @e ith custom colour associated with the colour dialog. @a i should
|
||||
be an integer between 0 and 15.
|
||||
The default custom colours are invalid colours.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetCustomColour(int i);
|
||||
wxColour GetCustomColour(int i) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Under Windows, tells the Windows colour dialog to display the full dialog
|
||||
@ -449,45 +449,45 @@ public:
|
||||
the bin (@c wxPRINTBIN_DEFAULT is returned).
|
||||
See SetBin() for the full list of bin values.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPrintBin GetBin();
|
||||
wxPrintBin GetBin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if collation is on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCollate();
|
||||
bool GetCollate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if colour printing is on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetColour();
|
||||
bool GetColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the duplex mode. One of wxDUPLEX_SIMPLEX, wxDUPLEX_HORIZONTAL,
|
||||
wxDUPLEX_VERTICAL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDuplexMode GetDuplex();
|
||||
wxDuplexMode GetDuplex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of copies requested by the user.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNoCopies();
|
||||
int GetNoCopies() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the orientation. This can be wxLANDSCAPE or wxPORTRAIT.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOrientation();
|
||||
int GetOrientation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the paper size id. For more information, see SetPaperId().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPaperSize GetPaperId();
|
||||
wxPaperSize GetPaperId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the printer name. If the printer name is the empty string, it indicates
|
||||
that the default
|
||||
printer should be used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetPrinterName();
|
||||
const wxString GetPrinterName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current print quality. This can be a positive integer, denoting the
|
||||
@ -498,14 +498,14 @@ public:
|
||||
back a positive integer
|
||||
indicating the current resolution setting.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPrintQuality GetQuality();
|
||||
wxPrintQuality GetQuality() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the print data is valid for using in print dialogs.
|
||||
This can return @false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
|
||||
On all other platforms, it returns @true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the current bin. Possible values are:
|
||||
@ -630,32 +630,32 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the user requested that all pages be printed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetAllPages();
|
||||
bool GetAllPages() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the user requested that the document(s) be collated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCollate();
|
||||
bool GetCollate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @e from page number, as entered by the user.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFromPage();
|
||||
int GetFromPage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @e maximum page number.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMaxPage();
|
||||
int GetMaxPage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @e minimum page number.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMinPage();
|
||||
int GetMinPage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of copies requested by the user.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNoCopies();
|
||||
int GetNoCopies() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a reference to the internal wxPrintData object.
|
||||
@ -665,26 +665,26 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the user has selected printing to a file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPrintToFile();
|
||||
bool GetPrintToFile() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the user requested that the selection be printed (where
|
||||
'selection' is
|
||||
a concept specific to the application).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSelection();
|
||||
bool GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @e to page number, as entered by the user.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetToPage();
|
||||
int GetToPage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the print data is valid for using in print dialogs.
|
||||
This can return @false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
|
||||
On all other platforms, it returns @true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 'Collate' checkbox to @true or @false.
|
||||
|
@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the pane has been collapsed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCollapsed();
|
||||
bool GetCollapsed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets this as a collapsed pane event (if @a collapsed is @true) or as an
|
||||
@ -158,15 +158,15 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the pane window. Add controls to the returned wxWindow
|
||||
to make them collapsible.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetPane();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetPane() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the pane window is currently hidden.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCollapsed();
|
||||
bool IsCollapsed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the pane window is currently shown.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsExpanded();
|
||||
bool IsExpanded() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -79,12 +79,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the alpha value, on platforms where alpha is not yet supported, this
|
||||
always returns wxALPHA_OPAQUE.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char Alpha();
|
||||
unsigned char Alpha() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the blue intensity.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char Blue();
|
||||
unsigned char Blue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -93,7 +93,8 @@ public:
|
||||
This function is new since wxWidgets version 2.7.0
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAsString(long flags);
|
||||
wxC2S_NAME wxC2S_CSS_SYNTAX, to obtain
|
||||
const wxC2S_NAME, to obtain the colour name (e.g.
|
||||
wxColour(255,0,0) - "red"), wxC2S_CSS_SYNTAX, to obtain
|
||||
the colour in the "rgb(r,g,b)" or "rgba(r,g,b,a)" syntax
|
||||
(e.g. wxColour(255,0,0,85) - "rgba(255,0,0,0.333)"), and
|
||||
wxC2S_HTML_SYNTAX, to obtain the colour as "#" followed
|
||||
@ -109,23 +110,23 @@ public:
|
||||
On X, an allocated pixel value is returned.
|
||||
-1 is returned if the pixel is invalid (on X, unallocated).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetPixel();
|
||||
long GetPixel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the green intensity.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char Green();
|
||||
unsigned char Green() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the colour object is valid (the colour has been initialised
|
||||
with RGB values).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the red intensity.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char Red();
|
||||
unsigned char Red() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The derived class must implement this to return
|
||||
string representation of the value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetStringValue();
|
||||
wxString GetStringValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The derived class must implement this to initialize
|
||||
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Utility method that returns @true if Create has been called.
|
||||
Useful in conjunction with LazyCreate().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCreated();
|
||||
bool IsCreated() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The derived class may implement this to return
|
||||
@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the disabled state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapDisabled();
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapDisabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns button mouse hover bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the mouse hover state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapHover();
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapHover() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns default button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the normal state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapNormal();
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapNormal() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns depressed button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the depressed state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapPressed();
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapPressed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns current size of the dropdown button.
|
||||
@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCustomPaintWidth().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCustomPaintWidth();
|
||||
int GetCustomPaintWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns features supported by wxComboCtrl. If needed feature is missing,
|
||||
@ -352,12 +352,12 @@ public:
|
||||
@b Note: Under wxMSW, this function always returns 0 if the combo control
|
||||
doesn't have the focus.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetInsertionPoint();
|
||||
long GetInsertionPoint() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the last position in the combo control text field.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetLastPosition();
|
||||
long GetLastPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns current popup interface that has been set with SetPopupControl.
|
||||
@ -367,29 +367,29 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns popup window containing the popup control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetPopupWindow();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetPopupWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the text control which is part of the combo control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTextCtrl* GetTextCtrl();
|
||||
wxTextCtrl* GetTextCtrl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns actual indentation in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCoord GetTextIndent();
|
||||
wxCoord GetTextIndent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns area covered by the text field (includes everything except
|
||||
borders and the dropdown button).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxRect GetTextRect();
|
||||
const wxRect GetTextRect() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns text representation of the current value. For writable
|
||||
combo control it always returns the value in the text field.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetValue();
|
||||
wxString GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Dismisses the popup window.
|
||||
@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the popup is currently shown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPopupShown();
|
||||
bool IsPopupShown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the popup window is in the given state.
|
||||
@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is fully visible.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPopupWindowState(int state);
|
||||
bool IsPopupWindowState(int state) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Implement in a derived class to define what happens on
|
||||
|
@ -123,33 +123,33 @@ public:
|
||||
to the clipboard.
|
||||
Only available on Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanCopy();
|
||||
bool CanCopy() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the combobox is editable and there is a text selection to copy
|
||||
to the clipboard.
|
||||
Only available on Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanCut();
|
||||
bool CanCut() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the combobox is editable and there is text on the clipboard
|
||||
that can be pasted into the
|
||||
text field. Only available on Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanPaste();
|
||||
bool CanPaste() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the combobox is editable and the last undo can be redone.
|
||||
Only available on Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanRedo();
|
||||
bool CanRedo() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the combobox is editable and the last edit can be undone.
|
||||
Only available on Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanUndo();
|
||||
bool CanUndo() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copies the selected text to the clipboard.
|
||||
@ -191,19 +191,19 @@ public:
|
||||
returns the item currently selected in the dropdown list if it's open or the
|
||||
same thing as wxControlWithItems::GetSelection otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCurrentSelection();
|
||||
int GetCurrentSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the insertion point for the combobox's text field.
|
||||
@b Note: Under wxMSW, this function always returns 0 if the combobox
|
||||
doesn't have the focus.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetInsertionPoint();
|
||||
long GetInsertionPoint() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the last position in the combobox text field.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxTextPos GetLastPosition();
|
||||
virtual wxTextPos GetLastPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This is the same as wxTextCtrl::GetSelection
|
||||
@ -211,12 +211,12 @@ public:
|
||||
different method from wxControlWithItems::GetSelection.
|
||||
Currently this method is only implemented in wxMSW and wxGTK.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetSelection(long* from, long* to);
|
||||
void GetSelection(long* from, long* to) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current value in the combobox text field.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetValue();
|
||||
wxString GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Pastes text from the clipboard to the text field.
|
||||
|
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
returns @true if either a group or an entry with a given name exists
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Exists(wxString& strName);
|
||||
bool Exists(wxString& strName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
permanently writes all changes (otherwise, they're only written from object's
|
||||
@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the application name.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppName();
|
||||
wxString GetAppName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the type of the given entry or @e Unknown if the entry doesn't
|
||||
@ -229,68 +229,68 @@ public:
|
||||
key with wxRegConfig will fail.
|
||||
The result is an element of enum EntryType:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
enum wxConfigBase::EntryType GetEntryType(const wxString& name);
|
||||
enum wxConfigBase::EntryType GetEntryType(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the first entry.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetFirstEntry(wxString& str, long& index);
|
||||
bool GetFirstEntry(wxString& str, long& index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the first group.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetFirstGroup(wxString& str, long& index);
|
||||
bool GetFirstGroup(wxString& str, long& index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the next entry.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetNextEntry(wxString& str, long& index);
|
||||
bool GetNextEntry(wxString& str, long& index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the next group.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetNextGroup(wxString& str, long& index);
|
||||
bool GetNextGroup(wxString& str, long& index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = false);
|
||||
uint GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get number of entries/subgroups in the current group, with or without its
|
||||
subgroups.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint GetNumberOfGroups(bool bRecursive = false);
|
||||
uint GetNumberOfGroups(bool bRecursive = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieve the current path (always as absolute path).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetPath();
|
||||
const wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the vendor name.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVendorName();
|
||||
wxString GetVendorName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
returns @true if the entry by this name exists
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasEntry(wxString& strName);
|
||||
bool HasEntry(wxString& strName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
returns @true if the group by this name exists
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasGroup(const wxString& strName);
|
||||
bool HasGroup(const wxString& strName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if we are expanding environment variables in key values.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsExpandingEnvVars();
|
||||
bool IsExpandingEnvVars() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if we are writing defaults back to the config file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsRecordingDefaults();
|
||||
bool IsRecordingDefaults() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
These function are the core of wxConfigBase class: they allow you to read and
|
||||
@ -399,48 +399,51 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a boolean
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString* str);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString* str,
|
||||
const wxString& defaultVal);
|
||||
wxString Read(const wxString& key,
|
||||
const
|
||||
wxString& defaultVal);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, long* l);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, long* l, long defaultVal);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, double* d);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, double* d, double defaultVal);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* b);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* d, bool defaultVal);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, wxMemoryBuffer* buf);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, T* value);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, T* value,
|
||||
T const& defaultVal);
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString* str) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString* str,
|
||||
const wxString& defaultVal) const;
|
||||
const wxString Read(const wxString& key,
|
||||
const
|
||||
wxString& defaultVal) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, long* l) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, long* l,
|
||||
long defaultVal) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, double* d) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, double* d,
|
||||
double defaultVal) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* b) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* d,
|
||||
bool defaultVal) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, wxMemoryBuffer* buf) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, T* value) const;
|
||||
const bool Read(const wxString& key, T* value,
|
||||
T const& defaultVal) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads a bool value from the key and returns it. @a defaultVal is returned
|
||||
if the key is not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long ReadBool(const wxString& key, bool defaultVal);
|
||||
long ReadBool(const wxString& key, bool defaultVal) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads a double value from the key and returns it. @a defaultVal is returned
|
||||
if the key is not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long ReadDouble(const wxString& key, double defaultVal);
|
||||
long ReadDouble(const wxString& key, double defaultVal) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads a long value from the key and returns it. @a defaultVal is returned
|
||||
if the key is not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long ReadLong(const wxString& key, long defaultVal);
|
||||
long ReadLong(const wxString& key, long defaultVal) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads a value of type T, for which function
|
||||
wxFromString is defined, from the key and returns it.
|
||||
@a defaultVal is returned if the key is not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
T ReadObject(const wxString& key, T const& defaultVal);
|
||||
T ReadObject(const wxString& key, T const& defaultVal) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The functions in this section allow to rename entries or subgroups of the
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
||||
any, use GetLabelText() if they are
|
||||
undesired.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLabel();
|
||||
wxString GetLabel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
|
||||
version, without the mnemonics characters.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetLabelText();
|
||||
static wxString GetLabelText(const wxString& label);
|
||||
const static wxString GetLabelText(const wxString& label);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the help controller associated with this help provider.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHelpControllerBase* GetHelpController();
|
||||
wxHelpControllerBase* GetHelpController() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the help controller associated with this help provider.
|
||||
|
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData(unsigned int n);
|
||||
void* GetClientData(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the client data associated with the given item (if any).
|
||||
@ -133,14 +133,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject(unsigned int n);
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsEmpty()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetCount();
|
||||
unsigned int GetCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the selected item or @c wxNOT_FOUND if no item is
|
||||
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetSelection(), GetStringSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelection();
|
||||
int GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the item with the given index.
|
||||
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns The label of the item or an empty string if the position was
|
||||
invalid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetString(unsigned int n);
|
||||
wxString GetString(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the selected item or an empty string if no item is
|
||||
@ -173,12 +173,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetStringSelection();
|
||||
wxString GetStringSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the array of the labels of all items in the control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArrayString GetStrings();
|
||||
wxArrayString GetStrings() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCount()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty();
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This is the same as SetSelection() and
|
||||
|
@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if cursor data is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
@ -69,12 +69,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the data.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void* GetData();
|
||||
virtual void* GetData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the data size in bytes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual size_t GetSize();
|
||||
virtual size_t GetSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the data. The data object will make an internal copy.
|
||||
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the clipboard or the DnD operation. You can use this method to find
|
||||
out what kind of data object was recieved.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataFormat GetReceivedFormat();
|
||||
wxDataFormat GetReceivedFormat() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -179,19 +179,19 @@ public:
|
||||
Copy the data to the buffer, return @true on success. Must be implemented in the
|
||||
derived class if the object supports rendering its data.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool GetDataHere(void buf);
|
||||
virtual bool GetDataHere(void buf) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the size of our data. Must be implemented in the derived class if the
|
||||
object supports rendering its data.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual size_t GetDataSize();
|
||||
virtual size_t GetDataSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the (one and only one) format supported by this object. It is supposed
|
||||
that the format is supported in both directions.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxDataFormat GetFormat();
|
||||
const wxDataFormat GetFormat() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy the data from the buffer, return @true on success. Must be implemented in
|
||||
@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets' internals. Use this method to get data in bitmap form from
|
||||
the wxClipboard.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxBitmap GetBitmap();
|
||||
virtual wxBitmap GetBitmap() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the bitmap associated with the data object. This method is called when the
|
||||
@ -348,12 +348,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the name of a custom format (this function will fail for a standard
|
||||
format).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetId();
|
||||
wxString GetId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the platform-specific number identifying the format.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
NativeFormat GetType();
|
||||
NativeFormat GetType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the format to be the custom format identified by the given name.
|
||||
@ -368,12 +368,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the formats are different.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator !=(const wxDataFormat& format);
|
||||
bool operator !=(const wxDataFormat& format) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the formats are equal.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator ==(const wxDataFormat& format);
|
||||
bool operator ==(const wxDataFormat& format) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the URL stored by this object, as a string.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetURL();
|
||||
wxString GetURL() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the URL stored by this object.
|
||||
@ -562,30 +562,30 @@ public:
|
||||
@e formats. There is enough space for GetFormatCount(dir) formats in it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void GetAllFormats(wxDataFormat* formats,
|
||||
Direction dir = Get);
|
||||
Direction dir = Get) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The method will write the data of the format @a format in the buffer @a buf and
|
||||
return @true on success, @false on failure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void buf);
|
||||
virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void buf) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the data size of the given format @e format.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format);
|
||||
virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of available formats for rendering or setting the data.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual size_t GetFormatCount(Direction dir = Get);
|
||||
virtual size_t GetFormatCount(Direction dir = Get) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the preferred format for either rendering the data (if @a dir is @c Get,
|
||||
its default value) or for setting it. Usually this will be the
|
||||
native format of the wxDataObject.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(Direction dir = Get);
|
||||
virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(Direction dir = Get) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the data in the format @a format of the length @a len provided in the
|
||||
@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxWidgets' internals. Use this method to get data in text form from
|
||||
the wxClipboard.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxString GetText();
|
||||
virtual wxString GetText() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the data size. By default, returns the size of the text data
|
||||
@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ public:
|
||||
to return the text length plus 1 for a trailing zero, but this is not
|
||||
strictly required.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual size_t GetTextLength();
|
||||
virtual size_t GetTextLength() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the text associated with the data object. This method is called
|
||||
@ -704,5 +704,5 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the array of file names.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxArrayString GetFilenames();
|
||||
const wxArrayString GetFilenames() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the icon.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxIcon GetIcon();
|
||||
const wxIcon GetIcon() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetText();
|
||||
wxString GetText() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the icon.
|
||||
@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Used to clone the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxEvent* Clone();
|
||||
wxEvent* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the column in the control or -1
|
||||
if no column field was set by the event emitter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumn();
|
||||
int GetColumn() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the wxDataViewColumn from which
|
||||
@ -93,17 +93,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the wxDataViewModel associated with the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* GetModel();
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* GetModel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a the position of a context menu event in screen coordinates.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a reference to a value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxVariant GetValue();
|
||||
const wxVariant GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -206,18 +206,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the wxDataViewItem at the given @e row.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem GetItem(unsigned int row);
|
||||
wxDataViewItem GetItem(unsigned int row) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of given @e item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetRow(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
unsigned int GetRow(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to allow getting values from the model.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetValue(wxVariant& variant, unsigned int row,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
unsigned int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Call this after if the data has to be read again from
|
||||
@ -407,26 +407,26 @@ public:
|
||||
an item. Returns the number of items.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual unsigned int GetChildren(const wxDataViewItem& item,
|
||||
wxDataViewItemArray& children);
|
||||
wxDataViewItemArray& children) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to indicate the number of columns in the model.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual unsigned int GetColumnCount();
|
||||
virtual unsigned int GetColumnCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to indicate what type of data is stored in the
|
||||
column specified by @e col. This should return a string
|
||||
indicating the type of data as reported by wxVariant.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxString GetColumnType(unsigned int col);
|
||||
virtual wxString GetColumnType(unsigned int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to indicate which wxDataViewItem representing the parent
|
||||
of @a item or an invalid wxDataViewItem if the the root item is
|
||||
the parent item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewItem GetParent(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewItem GetParent(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to indicate the value of @e item
|
||||
@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void GetValue(wxVariant& variant,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem& item,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
unsigned int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this method to indicate if a container item merely
|
||||
@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ public:
|
||||
acts a normal item with entries for futher columns. By
|
||||
default returns @e @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool HasContainerColumns(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
virtual bool HasContainerColumns(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to indicate that the model provides a default compare
|
||||
@ -453,13 +453,13 @@ public:
|
||||
should be used. See also wxDataViewIndexListModel
|
||||
for a model which makes use of this.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool HasDefaultCompare();
|
||||
virtual bool HasDefaultCompare() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to indicate of @a item is a container, i.e. if
|
||||
it can have child items.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool IsContainer(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
virtual bool IsContainer(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Call this to inform the model that an item has been added
|
||||
@ -754,12 +754,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the ID.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetID();
|
||||
void* GetID() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the ID is not @e @NULL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1011,67 +1011,67 @@ public:
|
||||
position in the control which may change after reordering
|
||||
columns by the user.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewColumn* GetColumn(unsigned int pos);
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewColumn* GetColumn(unsigned int pos) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of columns.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual unsigned int GetColumnCount();
|
||||
virtual unsigned int GetColumnCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the column or -1 if not found in the control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual int GetColumnPosition(const wxDataViewColumn* column);
|
||||
virtual int GetColumnPosition(const wxDataViewColumn* column) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns column containing the expanders.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewColumn* GetExpanderColumn();
|
||||
wxDataViewColumn* GetExpanderColumn() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns indentation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetIndent();
|
||||
int GetIndent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns item rect.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect GetItemRect(const wxDataViewItem& item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewColumn* col = NULL);
|
||||
const wxDataViewColumn* col = NULL) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to the data model associated with the
|
||||
control (if any).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewModel* GetModel();
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewModel* GetModel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns first selected item or an invalid item if none is selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem GetSelection();
|
||||
wxDataViewItem GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fills @a sel with currently selected items and returns
|
||||
their number.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelections(wxDataViewItemArray& sel);
|
||||
int GetSelections(wxDataViewItemArray& sel) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the wxDataViewColumn currently responsible for sorting
|
||||
or @NULL if none has been selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewColumn* GetSortingColumn();
|
||||
virtual wxDataViewColumn* GetSortingColumn() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hittest.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void HitTest(const wxPoint& point, wxDataViewItem& item,
|
||||
wxDataViewColumn*& col);
|
||||
wxDataViewColumn*& col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return @true if the item is selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSelected(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
bool IsSelected(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Select the given item.
|
||||
@ -1481,7 +1481,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Calls the identical method from wxDataViewTreeStore.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChildCount(const wxDataViewItem& parent);
|
||||
int GetChildCount(const wxDataViewItem& parent) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the image list.
|
||||
@ -1491,35 +1491,35 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Calls the identical method from wxDataViewTreeStore.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetItemData(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
wxClientData* GetItemData(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Calls the identical method from wxDataViewTreeStore.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemExpandedIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemExpandedIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Calls the identical method from wxDataViewTreeStore.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Calls the identical method from wxDataViewTreeStore.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetItemText(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
wxString GetItemText(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Calls the identical method from wxDataViewTreeStore.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem GetNthChild(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
unsigned int pos);
|
||||
unsigned int pos) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the store.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewTreeStore* GetStore();
|
||||
const wxDataViewTreeStore* GetStore();
|
||||
wxDataViewTreeStore* GetStore() const;
|
||||
const wxDataViewTreeStore* GetStore() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -1653,33 +1653,33 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the number of children of item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChildCount(const wxDataViewItem& parent);
|
||||
int GetChildCount(const wxDataViewItem& parent) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the client data asoociated with the item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetItemData(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
wxClientData* GetItemData(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the icon to display in expanded containers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemExpandedIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemExpandedIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the icon of the item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
const wxIcon GetItemIcon(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the text of the item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetItemText(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
wxString GetItemText(const wxDataViewItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the nth child item of item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem GetNthChild(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
unsigned int pos);
|
||||
unsigned int pos) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a container after @e previous.
|
||||
|
@ -119,13 +119,13 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns @false if no range limits are currently set, @true if at least one
|
||||
bound is set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetRange(wxDateTime* dt1, wxDateTime dt2);
|
||||
bool GetRange(wxDateTime* dt1, wxDateTime dt2) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently selected. If there is no selection or the selection is
|
||||
outside of the current range, an invalid object is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetValue();
|
||||
wxDateTime GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Please note that this function is only available in the generic version of this
|
||||
|
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the date.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxDateTime GetDate();
|
||||
const wxDateTime GetDate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the date carried by the event, normally only used by the library
|
||||
|
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Adds the given date span to this object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime Add(const wxDateSpan& diff);
|
||||
wxDateTime Add(const wxDateSpan& diff);
|
||||
const wxDateTime& Add(const wxDateSpan& diff);
|
||||
wxDateTime operator+=(const wxDateSpan& diff);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -265,13 +265,13 @@ public:
|
||||
@see ParseFormat()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString Format(const wxChar* format = wxDefaultDateTimeFormat,
|
||||
const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Identical to calling Format() with @c "%x"
|
||||
argument (which means 'preferred date representation for the current locale').
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FormatDate();
|
||||
wxString FormatDate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the combined date-time representation in the ISO 8601 format
|
||||
@ -283,25 +283,25 @@ public:
|
||||
@see FormatISODate(), FormatISOTime(),
|
||||
ParseISOCombined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FormatISOCombined(char sep = 'T');
|
||||
wxString FormatISOCombined(char sep = 'T') const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function returns the date representation in the ISO 8601 format
|
||||
(YYYY-MM-DD).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FormatISODate();
|
||||
wxString FormatISODate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function returns the time representation in the ISO 8601 format
|
||||
(HH:MM:SS).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FormatISOTime();
|
||||
wxString FormatISOTime() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Identical to calling Format() with @c "%X"
|
||||
argument (which means 'preferred time representation for the current locale').
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FormatTime();
|
||||
wxString FormatTime() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Transform the date from the given time zone to the local one. If @a noDST is
|
||||
@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the date in the local time zone.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime FromTimezone(const TimeZone& tz,
|
||||
bool noDST = false);
|
||||
bool noDST = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the translations of the strings @c AM and @c PM used for time
|
||||
@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ public:
|
||||
DOS
|
||||
format.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned long GetAsDOS();
|
||||
unsigned long GetAsDOS() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the beginning of DST for the given country in the given year (current one
|
||||
@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the century of this date.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCentury(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
int GetCentury(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default country. The default country is used for DST
|
||||
@ -365,18 +365,18 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetDateOnly();
|
||||
wxDateTime GetDateOnly() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the day in the given timezone (local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetDay(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetDay(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the day of the year (in 1...366 range) in the given timezone
|
||||
(local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetDayOfYear(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetDayOfYear(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the end of DST for the given country in the given year (current one by
|
||||
@ -390,12 +390,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the hour in the given timezone (local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetHour(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetHour(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Synonym for GetJulianDayNumber().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetJDN();
|
||||
double GetJDN() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @ref setjdn() JDN corresponding to this date. Beware
|
||||
@ -403,14 +403,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetModifiedJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetJulianDayNumber();
|
||||
double GetJulianDayNumber() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the copy of this object to which
|
||||
SetToLastMonthDay() was applied.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetLastMonthDay(Month month = Inv_Month,
|
||||
int year = Inv_Year);
|
||||
int year = Inv_Year) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the copy of this object to which
|
||||
@ -423,17 +423,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Synonym for GetModifiedJulianDayNumber().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetMJD();
|
||||
double GetMJD() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the milliseconds in the given timezone (local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetMillisecond(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetMillisecond(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minute in the given timezone (local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetMinute(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetMinute(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @e Modified Julian Day Number (MJD) which is, by definition,
|
||||
@ -441,12 +441,12 @@ public:
|
||||
MJDs correspond to midnights of the dates in the Gregorian calendar and not th
|
||||
noons like JDN. The MJD 0 is Nov 17, 1858.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetModifiedJulianDayNumber();
|
||||
double GetModifiedJulianDayNumber() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the month in the given timezone (local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Month GetMonth(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
Month GetMonth(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the copy of this object to which
|
||||
SetToNextWeekDay() was applied.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetNextWeekDay(WeekDay weekday);
|
||||
wxDateTime GetNextWeekDay(WeekDay weekday) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the copy of this object to which
|
||||
SetToPrevWeekDay() was applied.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetPrevWeekDay(WeekDay weekday);
|
||||
wxDateTime GetPrevWeekDay(WeekDay weekday) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the @e Rata Die number of this date.
|
||||
@ -488,18 +488,18 @@ public:
|
||||
relative to a base date of December 31 of the year 0. Thus January 1 of the
|
||||
year 1 is Rata Die day 1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRataDie();
|
||||
double GetRataDie() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the seconds in the given timezone (local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetSecond(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetSecond(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of seconds since Jan 1, 1970. An assert failure will occur
|
||||
if the date is not in the range covered by @c time_t type.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
time_t GetTicks();
|
||||
time_t GetTicks() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current time.
|
||||
@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns broken down representation of the date and time.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Tm GetTm(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
Tm GetTm(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current time broken down. Note that this function returns a
|
||||
@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetWeekDay(WeekDay weekday, int n = 1,
|
||||
Month month = Inv_Month,
|
||||
int year = Inv_Year);
|
||||
int year = Inv_Year) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the copy of this object to which
|
||||
@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ public:
|
||||
applied.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetWeekDayInSameWeek(WeekDay weekday,
|
||||
WeekFlags flags = Monday_First);
|
||||
WeekFlags flags = Monday_First) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@ref overview_wxdatetime "week start" conventions.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetWeekOfMonth(WeekFlags flags = Monday_First,
|
||||
const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of the week of the year this date is in. The first week of
|
||||
@ -568,18 +568,18 @@ public:
|
||||
applies to the weeks starting on Monday only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime_t GetWeekOfYear(WeekFlags flags = Monday_First,
|
||||
const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the year in the given timezone (local one by default).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetYear(const TimeZone& tz = Local);
|
||||
int GetYear(const TimeZone& tz = Local) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the copy of this object to which
|
||||
SetToYearDay() was applied.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetYearDay(wxDateTime_t yday);
|
||||
wxDateTime GetYearDay(wxDateTime_t yday) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
@ -587,12 +587,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsBetween(const wxDateTime& t1, const wxDateTime& t2);
|
||||
bool IsBetween(const wxDateTime& t1, const wxDateTime& t2) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the DST is applied for this date in the given country.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int IsDST(Country country = Country_Default);
|
||||
int IsDST(Country country = Country_Default) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if DST was used n the given year (the current one by
|
||||
@ -604,31 +604,31 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date precedes the given one.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEarlierThan(const wxDateTime& datetime);
|
||||
bool IsEarlierThan(const wxDateTime& datetime) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the two dates are strictly identical.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEqualTo(const wxDateTime& datetime);
|
||||
bool IsEqualTo(const wxDateTime& datetime) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the date is equal to another one up to the given time
|
||||
interval, i.e. if the absolute difference between the two dates is less than
|
||||
this interval.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEqualUpTo(const wxDateTime& dt, const wxTimeSpan& ts);
|
||||
bool IsEqualUpTo(const wxDateTime& dt, const wxTimeSpan& ts) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the given date is later than the date of adoption of the
|
||||
Gregorian calendar in the given country (and hence the Gregorian calendar
|
||||
calculations make sense for it).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsGregorianDate(GregorianAdoption country = Gr_Standard);
|
||||
bool IsGregorianDate(GregorianAdoption country = Gr_Standard) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date is later than the given one.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsLaterThan(const wxDateTime& datetime);
|
||||
bool IsLaterThan(const wxDateTime& datetime) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the @a year is a leap one in the specified calendar.
|
||||
@ -640,12 +640,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the date is the same without comparing the time parts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSameDate(const wxDateTime& dt);
|
||||
bool IsSameDate(const wxDateTime& dt) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the time is the same (although dates may differ).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSameTime(const wxDateTime& dt);
|
||||
bool IsSameTime(const wxDateTime& dt) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date lies strictly between the two others,
|
||||
@ -653,12 +653,12 @@ public:
|
||||
@see IsBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsStrictlyBetween(const wxDateTime& t1,
|
||||
const wxDateTime& t2);
|
||||
const wxDateTime& t2) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the object represents a valid time moment.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsValid();
|
||||
bool IsValid() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function returns @true if the specified (or default) country is one
|
||||
@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true is this day is not a holiday in the given country.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsWorkDay(Country country = Country_Default);
|
||||
bool IsWorkDay(Country country = Country_Default) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Same as FromTimezone() but modifies the object
|
||||
@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Subtracts another date from this one and returns the difference between them
|
||||
as wxTimeSpan.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Subtract(const wxDateTime& dt);
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Subtract(const wxDateTime& dt) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Please see the @ref overview_tdatetimezones "time zone overview" for more
|
||||
@ -1121,13 +1121,13 @@ public:
|
||||
DST adjustments will be made.
|
||||
Returns the date in the new time zone.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime ToTimezone(const TimeZone& tz, bool noDST = false);
|
||||
wxDateTime ToTimezone(const TimeZone& tz, bool noDST = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This is the same as calling ToTimezone() with
|
||||
the argument @c GMT0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime ToUTC(bool noDST = false);
|
||||
wxDateTime ToUTC(bool noDST = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the midnight of the current day (i.e. the
|
||||
@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@ public:
|
||||
second and third ones modify this object in place.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Add(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
wxDateSpan Add(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
const wxDateSpan& Add(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
wxDateSpan operator+=(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1253,12 +1253,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDays();
|
||||
int GetDays() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of the months (not counting the years) in this date span.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMonths();
|
||||
int GetMonths() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the combined number of days in this date span, counting both weeks and
|
||||
@ -1266,19 +1266,19 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeeks(), GetDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetTotalDays();
|
||||
int GetTotalDays() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of weeks in this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWeeks();
|
||||
int GetWeeks() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of years in this date span.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetYears();
|
||||
int GetYears() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one month.
|
||||
@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ public:
|
||||
object in place.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Multiply(int factor);
|
||||
wxDateSpan Multiply(int factor);
|
||||
const wxDateSpan& Multiply(int factor);
|
||||
wxDateSpan operator*=(int factor);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see Neg()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Negate();
|
||||
wxDateSpan Negate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the number of days (without modifying any other components) in this date
|
||||
@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ public:
|
||||
object, the second and third ones modify this object in place.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Subtract(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
wxDateSpan Subtract(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
const wxDateSpan& Subtract(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
wxDateSpan operator+=(const wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1388,14 +1388,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date span is different from the other one.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator!=(wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
bool operator!=(wxDateSpan& other) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date span is equal to the other one. Two date spans
|
||||
are considered equal if and only if they have the same number of years and
|
||||
months and the same total number of days (counting both days and weeks).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator==(wxDateSpan& other);
|
||||
bool operator==(wxDateSpan& other) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the absolute value of the timespan: does not modify the
|
||||
object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Abs();
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Abs() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
GetSeconds()
|
||||
@ -1450,7 +1450,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the sum of two timespans.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Add(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Add(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
const wxTimeSpan& Add(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
wxTimeSpan operator+=(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1522,37 +1522,37 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the difference in number of days.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDays();
|
||||
int GetDays() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the difference in number of hours.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetHours();
|
||||
int GetHours() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the difference in number of milliseconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong GetMilliseconds();
|
||||
wxLongLong GetMilliseconds() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the difference in number of minutes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMinutes();
|
||||
int GetMinutes() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the difference in number of seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong GetSeconds();
|
||||
wxLongLong GetSeconds() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the internal representation of timespan.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong GetValue();
|
||||
wxLongLong GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the difference in number of weeks.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWeeks();
|
||||
int GetWeeks() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the timespan for one hour.
|
||||
@ -1567,36 +1567,36 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if two timespans are equal.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEqualTo(const wxTimeSpan& ts);
|
||||
bool IsEqualTo(const wxTimeSpan& ts) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Compares two timespans: works with the absolute values, i.e. -2
|
||||
hours is longer than 1 hour. Also, it will return @false if
|
||||
the timespans are equal in absolute value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsLongerThan(const wxTimeSpan& ts);
|
||||
bool IsLongerThan(const wxTimeSpan& ts) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the timespan is negative.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsNegative();
|
||||
bool IsNegative() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the timespan is empty.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsNull();
|
||||
bool IsNull() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the timespan is positive.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPositive();
|
||||
bool IsPositive() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Compares two timespans: works with the absolute values, i.e. 1
|
||||
hour is shorter than -2 hours. Also, it will return @false if
|
||||
the timespans are equal in absolute value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsShorterThan(const wxTimeSpan& ts);
|
||||
bool IsShorterThan(const wxTimeSpan& ts) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the timespan for one millisecond.
|
||||
@ -1623,7 +1623,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Multiplies timespan by a scalar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Multiply(int n);
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Multiply(int n);
|
||||
const wxTimeSpan& Multiply(int n);
|
||||
wxTimeSpan operator*=(int n);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1638,7 +1638,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns timespan with inverted sign.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Negate();
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Negate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Add()
|
||||
@ -1697,7 +1697,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the difference of two timespans.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Subtract(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
wxTimeSpan Subtract(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
const wxTimeSpan& Subtract(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
wxTimeSpan operator-=(const wxTimeSpan& diff);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -435,19 +435,19 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the brush used for painting the background (see wxDC::SetBackground).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBackground();
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBackground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: @c wxSOLID or @c wxTRANSPARENT.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBackgroundMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode();
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current brush (see wxDC::SetBrush).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBrush();
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBrush() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the character height of the currently set font.
|
||||
@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDisplayDepth
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDepth();
|
||||
int GetDepth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current font. Notice that even although each device context object has
|
||||
@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ public:
|
||||
initially and only after calling SetFont() a valid
|
||||
font is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current layout direction of the device context. On platforms where RTL
|
||||
@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLayoutDirection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLayoutDirection GetLayoutDirection();
|
||||
wxLayoutDirection GetLayoutDirection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current logical function (see wxDC::SetLogicalFunction).
|
||||
@ -517,14 +517,14 @@ public:
|
||||
void GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& string, wxCoord* w,
|
||||
wxCoord* h,
|
||||
wxCoord* heightLine = NULL,
|
||||
wxFont* font = NULL);
|
||||
wxSize GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& string);
|
||||
wxFont* font = NULL) const;
|
||||
const wxSize GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& string) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the resolution of the device in pixels per inch.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetPPI();
|
||||
wxSize GetPPI() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fills the @a widths array with the widths from the beginning of
|
||||
@ -538,12 +538,12 @@ public:
|
||||
@see GetMultiLineTextExtent(), GetTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPartialTextExtents(const wxString& text,
|
||||
wxArrayInt& widths);
|
||||
wxArrayInt& widths) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current pen (see wxDC::SetPen).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxPen GetPen();
|
||||
const wxPen GetPen() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets in @a colour the colour at the specified location.
|
||||
@ -571,22 +571,22 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetSize(wxCoord* width, wxCoord* height);
|
||||
wxSize GetSize();
|
||||
void GetSize(wxCoord* width, wxCoord* height) const;
|
||||
const wxSize GetSize() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the horizontal and vertical resolution in millimetres.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetSizeMM(wxCoord* width, wxCoord* height);
|
||||
wxSize GetSizeMM();
|
||||
void GetSizeMM(wxCoord* width, wxCoord* height) const;
|
||||
const wxSize GetSizeMM() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current text background colour (see wxDC::SetTextBackground).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextBackground();
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextBackground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -608,14 +608,14 @@ public:
|
||||
wxCoord* h,
|
||||
wxCoord* descent = NULL,
|
||||
wxCoord* externalLeading = NULL,
|
||||
const wxFont* font = NULL);
|
||||
wxSize GetTextExtent(const wxString& string);
|
||||
const wxFont* font = NULL) const;
|
||||
const wxSize GetTextExtent(const wxString& string) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current text foreground colour (see wxDC::SetTextForeground).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextForeground();
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextForeground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current user scale factor (set by wxDC::SetUserScale).
|
||||
|
@ -334,8 +334,8 @@ public:
|
||||
Gets the brush used for painting the background (see
|
||||
wxSVGFileDC::SetBackground).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBrush GetBackground();
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBackground();
|
||||
wxBrush GetBackground() const;
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBackground() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -343,14 +343,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::SetBackgroundMode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode();
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current brush (see wxSVGFileDC::SetBrush).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBrush GetBrush();
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBrush();
|
||||
wxBrush GetBrush() const;
|
||||
const wxBrush GetBrush() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -373,8 +373,8 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current font (see wxSVGFileDC::SetFont).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -391,8 +391,8 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current pen (see wxSVGFileDC::SetPen).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPen GetPen();
|
||||
const wxPen GetPen();
|
||||
wxPen GetPen() const;
|
||||
const wxPen GetPen() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -410,8 +410,8 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current text background colour (see wxSVGFileDC::SetTextBackground).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetTextBackground();
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextBackground();
|
||||
wxColour GetTextBackground() const;
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextBackground() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -437,8 +437,8 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current text foreground colour (see wxSVGFileDC::SetTextForeground).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetTextForeground();
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextForeground();
|
||||
wxColour GetTextForeground() const;
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextForeground() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ public:
|
||||
report should be processed or @false if the user chose to cancel report
|
||||
generation or removed all files from it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Show(wxDebugReport& dbgrpt);
|
||||
bool Show(wxDebugReport& dbgrpt) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the full path of the compressed file (empty if creation failed).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetCompressedFileName();
|
||||
const wxString GetCompressedFileName() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This method should be used to construct the full name of the files which you
|
||||
wish to add to the report using AddFile().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetDirectory();
|
||||
const wxString GetDirectory() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the name (relative to
|
||||
@ -217,25 +217,25 @@ public:
|
||||
file with the given index. If @a n is greater than or equal to the number of
|
||||
filse, @false is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetFile(size_t n, wxString* name, wxString* desc);
|
||||
bool GetFile(size_t n, wxString* name, wxString* desc) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current number files in this report.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetFilesCount();
|
||||
size_t GetFilesCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the name used as a base name for various files, by default
|
||||
wxApp::GetAppName is used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetReportName();
|
||||
wxString GetReportName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the object was successfully initialized. If this method
|
||||
returns
|
||||
@false the report can't be used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Processes this report: the base class simply notifies the user that the
|
||||
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxDebugReportPreview::Show for more
|
||||
information.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Show(wxDebugReport& dbgrpt);
|
||||
bool Show(wxDebugReport& dbgrpt) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetAffirmativeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAffirmativeId();
|
||||
int GetAffirmativeId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to return a window containing the main content of the dialog.
|
||||
@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and allows the @ref overview_wxdialogoverview "layout adaptation code" to know
|
||||
that only the pages need to be made scrollable.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetContentWindow();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetContentWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the identifier of the button to map presses of @c ESC
|
||||
@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEscapeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetEscapeId();
|
||||
int GetEscapeId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the dialog has been adapted, usually by making it scrollable
|
||||
@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ public:
|
||||
See also @ref overview_autoscrollingdialogs "Automatic scrolling dialogs" for
|
||||
more on layout adaptation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetLayoutAdaptationDone();
|
||||
bool GetLayoutAdaptationDone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets a value representing the aggressiveness of search for buttons and sizers
|
||||
@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ public:
|
||||
See also SetLayoutAdaptationMode() and @ref overview_autoscrollingdialogs
|
||||
"Automatic scrolling dialogs".
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDialogLayoutAdaptationMode GetLayoutAdaptationMode();
|
||||
wxDialogLayoutAdaptationMode GetLayoutAdaptationMode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
A static function getting the current layout adapter object.
|
||||
@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ public:
|
||||
arbitrary controls are not currently supported.
|
||||
This function is not available on any other platform.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxToolBar* GetToolBar();
|
||||
wxToolBar* GetToolBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Iconizes or restores the dialog. Windows only.
|
||||
@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@remarks Always returns @false under Windows since dialogs cannot be
|
||||
iconized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsIconized();
|
||||
bool IsIconized() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
A static function returning @true if layout adaptation is enabled for all
|
||||
@ -331,12 +331,12 @@ public:
|
||||
See also @ref overview_autoscrollingdialogs "Automatic scrolling dialogs" for
|
||||
more on layout adaptation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsMainButton(wxWindowID& id);
|
||||
bool IsMainButton(wxWindowID& id) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the dialog box is modal, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsModal();
|
||||
bool IsModal() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The default handler for wxEVT_SYS_COLOUR_CHANGED.
|
||||
|
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ public:
|
||||
parameter to Dial() on this machine and returns
|
||||
their number (may be 0).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetISPNames(wxArrayString& names);
|
||||
size_t GetISPNames(wxArrayString& names) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hang up the currently active dial up connection.
|
||||
@ -113,14 +113,14 @@ public:
|
||||
guaranteed to be correct, so it is better to ask user for
|
||||
confirmation or give him a possibility to override it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAlwaysOnline();
|
||||
bool IsAlwaysOnline() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
@see Dial()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDialing();
|
||||
bool IsDialing() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the dialup manager was initialized correctly. If this
|
||||
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ public:
|
||||
good idea to call this function and check its result before calling any other
|
||||
wxDialUpManager methods
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the computer is connected to the network: under Windows,
|
||||
@ -136,14 +136,14 @@ public:
|
||||
the "well-known host" (as specified by
|
||||
wxDialUpManager::SetWellKnownHost) is reachable.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOnline();
|
||||
bool IsOnline() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
, @b const wxString&@e commandHangup = wxT("/usr/bin/poff"))
|
||||
, wxString&@e commandHangup = wxT("/usr/bin/poff"))
|
||||
This method is for Unix only.
|
||||
Sets the commands to start up the network and to hang up again.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetConnectCommand();
|
||||
void SetConnectCommand() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sometimes the built-in logic for determining the online status may fail,
|
||||
@ -187,12 +187,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Is this a @c CONNECTED or @c DISCONNECTED event? In other words, does it
|
||||
notify about transition from offline to online state or vice versa?
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsConnectedEvent();
|
||||
bool IsConnectedEvent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Does this event come from wxDialUpManager::Dial() or from some extrenal
|
||||
process (i.e. does it result from our own attempt to establish the
|
||||
connection)?
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOwnEvent();
|
||||
bool IsOwnEvent() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -175,19 +175,19 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetFirst(wxString* filename,
|
||||
const wxString& filespec = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
int flags = wxDIR_DEFAULT);
|
||||
int flags = wxDIR_DEFAULT) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the name of the directory itself. The returned string does not have the
|
||||
trailing path separator (slash or backslash).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName();
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Continue enumerating files which satisfy the criteria specified by the last
|
||||
call to GetFirst().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetNext(wxString* filename);
|
||||
bool GetNext(wxString* filename) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the size (in bytes) of all files recursively found in @c dir or
|
||||
@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the directory was successfully opened by a previous call to
|
||||
Open().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOpened();
|
||||
bool IsOpened() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Open the directory for enumerating, returns @true on success
|
||||
|
@ -96,33 +96,33 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the default path.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetDefaultPath();
|
||||
wxString GetDefaultPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets selected filename path only (else empty string).
|
||||
This function doesn't count a directory as a selection.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFilePath();
|
||||
wxString GetFilePath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the filter string.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFilter();
|
||||
wxString GetFilter() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current filter index (zero-based).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFilterIndex();
|
||||
int GetFilterIndex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the filter list control (if present).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDirFilterListCtrl* GetFilterListCtrl();
|
||||
wxDirFilterListCtrl* GetFilterListCtrl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the currently-selected directory or filename.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the root id for the tree control.
|
||||
@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the tree control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTreeCtrl* GetTreeCtrl();
|
||||
wxTreeCtrl* GetTreeCtrl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Initializes variables.
|
||||
|
@ -70,12 +70,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the message that will be displayed on the dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetMessage();
|
||||
wxString GetMessage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the default or user-selected path.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the message that will be displayed on the dialog.
|
||||
|
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public:
|
||||
same as GetGeometry() but it could be less if
|
||||
there is a taskbar (or equivalent) on this display.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect GetClientArea();
|
||||
wxRect GetClientArea() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of connected displays.
|
||||
@ -68,12 +68,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current video mode that this display is in.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxVideoMode GetCurrentMode();
|
||||
wxVideoMode GetCurrentMode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the bit depth of the display whose index was passed to the constructor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDepth();
|
||||
int GetDepth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the display on which the given point lies. Returns
|
||||
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the bounding rectangle of the display whose index was passed to the
|
||||
constructor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect GetGeometry();
|
||||
wxRect GetGeometry() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fills and returns an array with all the video modes that
|
||||
@ -107,12 +107,12 @@ public:
|
||||
supported by this display and match the mode parameter
|
||||
(if mode is not wxDefaultVideoMode).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArrayVideoModes GetModes(const wxVideoMode& mode = wxDefaultVideoMode);
|
||||
wxArrayVideoModes GetModes(const wxVideoMode& mode = wxDefaultVideoMode) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the display's name. A name is not available on all platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName();
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the display is the primary display. The primary display is the
|
||||
|
@ -109,12 +109,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the document associated with this frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocument* GetDocument();
|
||||
wxDocument* GetDocument() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the view associated with this frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxView* GetView();
|
||||
wxView* GetView() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the currently active view to be the frame's view. You may need
|
||||
|
@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the directory last selected by the user when opening a file. Initially
|
||||
empty.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLastDirectory();
|
||||
wxString GetLastDirectory() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of documents that can be open simultaneously.
|
||||
@ -688,12 +688,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets a pointer to the document associated with the view.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocument* GetDocument();
|
||||
wxDocument* GetDocument() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the document manager instance associated with this view.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocManager* GetDocumentManager();
|
||||
wxDocManager* GetDocumentManager() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the frame associated with the view (if any). Note that this "frame'' is
|
||||
@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ public:
|
||||
constructor).
|
||||
Not currently used by the framework.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetViewName();
|
||||
wxString GetViewName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when a view is activated by means of Activate(). The default
|
||||
@ -858,12 +858,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the document associated with this frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocument* GetDocument();
|
||||
wxDocument* GetDocument() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the view associated with this frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxView* GetView();
|
||||
wxView* GetView() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the currently active view to be the frame's view. You may need
|
||||
@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the associated @ref overview_wxdocmanager "document manager object".
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocManager* GetDocumentManager();
|
||||
wxDocManager* GetDocumentManager() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Deletes all views and documents. If no user input cancelled the
|
||||
@ -1024,62 +1024,62 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the command processor associated with this document.
|
||||
See wxCommandProcessor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCommandProcessor* GetCommandProcessor();
|
||||
wxCommandProcessor* GetCommandProcessor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets a pointer to the associated document manager.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocManager* GetDocumentManager();
|
||||
wxDocManager* GetDocumentManager() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the document type name for this document. See the comment for
|
||||
documentTypeName.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetDocumentName();
|
||||
wxString GetDocumentName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets a pointer to the template that created the document.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* GetDocumentTemplate();
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* GetDocumentTemplate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Intended to return a suitable window for using as a parent for document-related
|
||||
dialog boxes. By default, uses the frame associated with the first view.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetDocumentWindow();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetDocumentWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the filename associated with this document, or "" if none is
|
||||
associated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFilename();
|
||||
wxString GetFilename() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
A convenience function to get the first view for a document, because
|
||||
in many cases a document will only have a single view.
|
||||
See also: GetViews()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxView* GetFirstView();
|
||||
wxView* GetFirstView() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the title for this document. The document title is used for an associated
|
||||
frame (if any), and is usually constructed by the framework from
|
||||
the filename.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetTitle();
|
||||
wxString GetTitle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the document name suitable to be shown to the user. The default
|
||||
implementation uses the document title, if any, of the name part of the
|
||||
document filename if it was set or, otherwise, the string @b unnamed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxString GetUserReadableName();
|
||||
virtual wxString GetUserReadableName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the list whose elements are the views on the document.
|
||||
See also: GetFirstView()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxList GetViews();
|
||||
wxList GetViews() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the document has been modified since the last save, @false
|
||||
@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the document).
|
||||
See also Modify().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool IsModified();
|
||||
virtual bool IsModified() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -1353,29 +1353,29 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the base identifier for the range used for appending items.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindowID GetBaseId();
|
||||
wxWindowID GetBaseId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of files currently stored in the file history.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetCount();
|
||||
size_t GetCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the file at this index (zero-based).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetHistoryFile(size_t index);
|
||||
wxString GetHistoryFile(size_t index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum number of files that can be stored.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMaxFiles();
|
||||
int GetMaxFiles() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the list of menus that are managed by this file history object.
|
||||
|
||||
@see UseMenu()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxList GetMenus();
|
||||
const wxList GetMenus() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the file history from the given config object. This function should be
|
||||
|
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ public:
|
||||
(together with
|
||||
wxDragImage::DoDrawImage) to provide a virtual drawing capability.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxRect GetImageRect(const wxPoint& pos);
|
||||
virtual wxRect GetImageRect(const wxPoint& pos) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hides the image. You may wish to call this before updating the window
|
||||
@ -193,5 +193,5 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool UpdateBackingFromWindow(wxDC& windowDC, wxMemoryDC& destDC,
|
||||
const wxRect& sourceRect,
|
||||
const wxRect& destRect);
|
||||
const wxRect& destRect) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the number of items in the array.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetCount();
|
||||
size_t GetCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -290,8 +290,8 @@ public:
|
||||
previously added to the array, but fail even if another, identical, element is
|
||||
in the array.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Index(T& item, bool searchFromEnd = false);
|
||||
int Index(T& item);
|
||||
int Index(T& item, bool searchFromEnd = false) const;
|
||||
const int Index(T& item) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxArray::AddAt for a common operation
|
||||
of "insert only if not found".
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t IndexForInsert(T item);
|
||||
size_t IndexForInsert(T item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the array is empty, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty();
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the item at the given position in the array. If @a index is out of
|
||||
@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The returned value is of type "reference to the array element type" for all of
|
||||
the array classes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
T Item(size_t index);
|
||||
T Item(size_t index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the last element in the array, i.e. is the same as Item(GetCount() - 1).
|
||||
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ public:
|
||||
The returned value is of type "reference to the array element type" for all of
|
||||
the array classes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
T Last();
|
||||
T Last() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
To use an array you must first define the array class. This is done with the
|
||||
|
@ -35,27 +35,27 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns @true if the load address and module size were retrieved, @false
|
||||
if this information is not available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetAddress(void** addr, size_t len);
|
||||
bool GetAddress(void** addr, size_t len) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the base name of this module, e.g. @c kernel32.dll or
|
||||
@c libc-2.3.2.so.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName();
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the full path of this module if available, e.g.
|
||||
@c c:\windows\system32\kernel32.dll or
|
||||
@c /lib/libc-2.3.2.so.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the version of this module, e.g. @c 5.2.3790.0 or
|
||||
@c 2.3.2. The returned string is empty if the version information is not
|
||||
available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVersion();
|
||||
wxString GetVersion() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDYNLIB_FUNCTION
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetSymbol(const wxString& name);
|
||||
void* GetSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function is available only under Windows as it is only useful when
|
||||
@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ public:
|
||||
automatically depending on the current build. Otherwise, this method is
|
||||
identical to GetSymbol().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetSymbolAorW(const wxString& name);
|
||||
void* GetSymbolAorW(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the symbol with the given @a name is present in the dynamic
|
||||
@ -290,12 +290,12 @@ public:
|
||||
this function doesn't log an error message if the symbol is not found.
|
||||
This function is new since wxWidgets version 2.5.4
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasSymbol(const wxString& name);
|
||||
bool HasSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the library was successfully loaded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsLoaded();
|
||||
bool IsLoaded() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This static method returns an array containing the details
|
||||
|
@ -46,13 +46,13 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Convert wxString and return new wxString object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Convert(const char* input, char* output);
|
||||
bool Convert(const wchar_t* input, wchar_t* output);
|
||||
bool Convert(const char* input, wchar_t* output);
|
||||
bool Convert(const wchar_t* input, char* output);
|
||||
bool Convert(char* str);
|
||||
bool Convert(wchar_t* str);
|
||||
wxString Convert(const wxString& input);
|
||||
bool Convert(const char* input, char* output) const;
|
||||
const bool Convert(const wchar_t* input, wchar_t* output) const;
|
||||
const bool Convert(const char* input, wchar_t* output) const;
|
||||
const bool Convert(const wchar_t* input, char* output) const;
|
||||
const bool Convert(char* str) const;
|
||||
const bool Convert(wchar_t* str) const;
|
||||
const wxString Convert(const wxString& input) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Notice that GetModifiers() is easier to use
|
||||
correctly than this function so you should consider using it in new code.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AltDown();
|
||||
bool AltDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
CMD is a pseudo key which is the same as Control for PC and Unix
|
||||
@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ public:
|
||||
this is the same as ControlDown() and under
|
||||
Mac this is the same as MetaDown().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CmdDown();
|
||||
bool CmdDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the control key was down at the time of the key event.
|
||||
Notice that GetModifiers() is easier to use
|
||||
correctly than this function so you should consider using it in new code.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ControlDown();
|
||||
bool ControlDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the virtual key code. ASCII events return normal ASCII values,
|
||||
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ public:
|
||||
charset. You can obtain the corresponding Unicode character using
|
||||
GetUnicodeKey().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetKeyCode();
|
||||
int GetKeyCode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the bitmask of modifier keys which were pressed when this event
|
||||
@ -129,14 +129,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
with this function.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetModifiers();
|
||||
int GetModifiers() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Obtains the position (in client coordinates) at which the key was pressed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
void GetPosition(long* x, long* y);
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
const void GetPosition(long* x, long* y) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@b NB: Currently the raw key codes are not supported by all ports, use
|
||||
@c #ifdef wxHAS_RAW_KEY_CODES to determine if this feature is available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxUint32 GetRawKeyCode();
|
||||
wxUint32 GetRawKeyCode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the low level key flags for this event. The flags are
|
||||
@ -153,24 +153,24 @@ public:
|
||||
@b NB: Currently the raw key flags are not supported by all ports, use
|
||||
@c #ifdef wxHAS_RAW_KEY_CODES to determine if this feature is available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxUint32 GetRawKeyFlags();
|
||||
wxUint32 GetRawKeyFlags() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the Unicode character corresponding to this key event.
|
||||
This function is only available in Unicode build, i.e. when
|
||||
@c wxUSE_UNICODE is 1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxChar GetUnicodeKey();
|
||||
wxChar GetUnicodeKey() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the X position (in client coordinates) of the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetX();
|
||||
long GetX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the Y (in client coordinates) position of the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetY();
|
||||
long GetY() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if either CTRL or ALT keys was down
|
||||
@ -180,21 +180,21 @@ public:
|
||||
META under X but the key presses even while NUMLOCK is on should
|
||||
be still processed normally).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasModifiers();
|
||||
bool HasModifiers() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the Meta key was down at the time of the key event.
|
||||
Notice that GetModifiers() is easier to use
|
||||
correctly than this function so you should consider using it in new code.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MetaDown();
|
||||
bool MetaDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the shift key was down at the time of the key event.
|
||||
Notice that GetModifiers() is easier to use
|
||||
correctly than this function so you should consider using it in new code.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ShiftDown();
|
||||
bool ShiftDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
bool m_altDown
|
||||
@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ButtonDown(int button = wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY);
|
||||
bool ButtonDown(int button = wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the specified button (or any button) was in a down state.
|
||||
@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ButtonIsDown(int button = wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY);
|
||||
bool ButtonIsDown(int button = wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was an up event from the specified button (or any
|
||||
@ -301,53 +301,53 @@ public:
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ButtonUp(int button = wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY);
|
||||
bool ButtonUp(int button = wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the identifier of the button changing state. This is a wxJOY_BUTTONn
|
||||
identifier, where
|
||||
n is one of 1, 2, 3, 4.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetButtonChange();
|
||||
int GetButtonChange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the down state of the buttons. This is a bitlist of wxJOY_BUTTONn
|
||||
identifiers, where
|
||||
n is one of 1, 2, 3, 4.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetButtonState();
|
||||
int GetButtonState() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the identifier of the joystick generating the event - one of
|
||||
wxJOYSTICK1 and wxJOYSTICK2.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetJoystick();
|
||||
int GetJoystick() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the x, y position of the joystick event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the z position of the joystick event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetZPosition();
|
||||
int GetZPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this was a button up or down event (@e not 'is any button
|
||||
down?').
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsButton();
|
||||
bool IsButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this was an x, y move event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsMove();
|
||||
bool IsMove() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this was a z move event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsZMove();
|
||||
bool IsZMove() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -376,14 +376,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns wxHORIZONTAL or wxVERTICAL, depending on the orientation of the
|
||||
scrollbar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOrientation();
|
||||
int GetOrientation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the scrollbar for the thumb track and release events.
|
||||
Note that this field can't be used for the other events, you need to query
|
||||
the window itself for the current position in that case.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPosition();
|
||||
int GetPosition() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -542,12 +542,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the UI element should be checked.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetChecked();
|
||||
bool GetChecked() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the UI element should be enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEnabled();
|
||||
bool GetEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Static function returning a value specifying how wxWidgets
|
||||
@ -562,35 +562,35 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the application has called Check(). For wxWidgets internal use
|
||||
only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSetChecked();
|
||||
bool GetSetChecked() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application has called Enable(). For wxWidgets internal use
|
||||
only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSetEnabled();
|
||||
bool GetSetEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application has called Show(). For wxWidgets internal use
|
||||
only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSetShown();
|
||||
bool GetSetShown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application has called SetText(). For wxWidgets internal
|
||||
use only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSetText();
|
||||
bool GetSetText() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the UI element should be shown.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetShown();
|
||||
bool GetShown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the text that should be set for the UI element.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetText();
|
||||
wxString GetText() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current interval between updates in milliseconds.
|
||||
@ -766,46 +766,46 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a first extra button double click.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux1DClick();
|
||||
bool Aux1DClick() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the first extra button mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux1Down();
|
||||
bool Aux1Down() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the first extra button mouse button is currently down,
|
||||
independent
|
||||
of the current event type.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux1IsDown();
|
||||
bool Aux1IsDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the first extra button mouse button changed to up.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux1Up();
|
||||
bool Aux1Up() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a second extra button double click.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux2DClick();
|
||||
bool Aux2DClick() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the second extra button mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux2Down();
|
||||
bool Aux2Down() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the second extra button mouse button is currently down,
|
||||
independent
|
||||
of the current event type.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux2IsDown();
|
||||
bool Aux2IsDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the second extra button mouse button changed to up.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Aux2Up();
|
||||
bool Aux2Up() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the identified mouse button is changing state. Valid
|
||||
@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxKeyEvent::CmdDown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CmdDown();
|
||||
bool CmdDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the control key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ public:
|
||||
double click events, @c wxMOUSE_BTN_MIDDLE and @c wxMOUSE_BTN_RIGHT
|
||||
for the same events for the middle and the right buttons respectively.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetButton();
|
||||
int GetButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of mouse clicks for this event: 1 for a simple click, 2
|
||||
@ -904,20 +904,20 @@ public:
|
||||
they generate different kinds of events however).
|
||||
This function is new since wxWidgets version 2.9.0
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetClickCount();
|
||||
int GetClickCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the configured number of lines (or whatever) to be scrolled per
|
||||
wheel action. Defaults to three.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetLinesPerAction();
|
||||
int GetLinesPerAction() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the logical mouse position in pixels (i.e. translated according to the
|
||||
translation set for the DC, which usually indicates that the window has been
|
||||
scrolled).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetLogicalPosition(const wxDC& dc);
|
||||
wxPoint GetLogicalPosition(const wxDC& dc) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -927,9 +927,9 @@ public:
|
||||
keyboard combination (e.g. under Windows when the "menu'' key is pressed), the
|
||||
returned position is @c wxDefaultPosition.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
void GetPosition(wxCoord* x, wxCoord* y);
|
||||
void GetPosition(long* x, long* y);
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
const void GetPosition(wxCoord* x, wxCoord* y) const;
|
||||
const void GetPosition(long* x, long* y) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ public:
|
||||
taken, and one such action (for example, scrolling one increment)
|
||||
should occur for each delta.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWheelDelta();
|
||||
int GetWheelDelta() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get wheel rotation, positive or negative indicates direction of
|
||||
@ -947,12 +947,12 @@ public:
|
||||
should be able to either do partial line scrolling or wait until several
|
||||
events accumulate before scrolling.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWheelRotation();
|
||||
int GetWheelRotation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns X coordinate of the physical mouse event position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetX();
|
||||
long GetX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns Y coordinate of the physical mouse event position.
|
||||
@ -964,29 +964,29 @@ public:
|
||||
down event -
|
||||
that may be tested using @e ButtonDown).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsButton();
|
||||
bool IsButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the system has been setup to do page scrolling with
|
||||
the mouse wheel instead of line scrolling.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPageScroll();
|
||||
bool IsPageScroll() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the mouse was leaving the window.
|
||||
See also Entering().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Leaving();
|
||||
bool Leaving() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a left double click.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LeftDClick();
|
||||
bool LeftDClick() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the left mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LeftDown();
|
||||
bool LeftDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the left mouse button is currently down, independent
|
||||
@ -1000,71 +1000,71 @@ public:
|
||||
This event is usually used in the mouse event handlers which process "move
|
||||
mouse" messages to determine whether the user is (still) dragging the mouse.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LeftIsDown();
|
||||
bool LeftIsDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the left mouse button changed to up.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LeftUp();
|
||||
bool LeftUp() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MetaDown();
|
||||
bool MetaDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a middle double click.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MiddleDClick();
|
||||
bool MiddleDClick() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the middle mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MiddleDown();
|
||||
bool MiddleDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the middle mouse button is currently down, independent
|
||||
of the current event type.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MiddleIsDown();
|
||||
bool MiddleIsDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the middle mouse button changed to up.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MiddleUp();
|
||||
bool MiddleUp() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this was a motion event and no mouse buttons were pressed.
|
||||
If any mouse button is held pressed, then this method returns @false and
|
||||
Dragging() returns @true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Moving();
|
||||
bool Moving() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a right double click.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool RightDClick();
|
||||
bool RightDClick() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the right mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool RightDown();
|
||||
bool RightDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the right mouse button is currently down, independent
|
||||
of the current event type.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool RightIsDown();
|
||||
bool RightIsDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the right mouse button changed to up.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool RightUp();
|
||||
bool RightUp() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the shift key was down at the time of the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ShiftDown();
|
||||
bool ShiftDown() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
bool m_altDown
|
||||
@ -1171,18 +1171,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns an array of filenames.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString* GetFiles();
|
||||
wxString* GetFiles() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of files dropped.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberOfFiles();
|
||||
int GetNumberOfFiles() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position at which the files were dropped.
|
||||
Returns an array of filenames.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxString* m_files
|
||||
@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Deprecated, use IsChecked() instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Checked();
|
||||
bool Checked() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns client data pointer for a listbox or choice selection event
|
||||
@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Notice that this method can not be used with
|
||||
wxCheckListBox currently.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsChecked();
|
||||
bool IsChecked() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
For a listbox or similar event, returns @true if it is a selection, @false if it
|
||||
@ -1342,7 +1342,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application or window is being activated, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetActive();
|
||||
bool GetActive() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1390,7 +1390,7 @@ public:
|
||||
If the event originated from a keyboard event, the value returned from this
|
||||
function will be wxDefaultPosition.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the position at which the menu should be shown.
|
||||
@ -1435,7 +1435,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the device context associated with the erase event to draw on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDC* GetDC();
|
||||
wxDC* GetDC() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the change is allowed (Veto()
|
||||
hasn't been called) or @false otherwise (if it was).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAllowed();
|
||||
bool IsAllowed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Prevents the change announced by this event from happening.
|
||||
@ -1656,13 +1656,13 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetOrigin()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHelpEvent::Origin GetOrigin();
|
||||
wxHelpEvent::Origin GetOrigin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the left-click position of the mouse, in screen coordinates. This allows
|
||||
the application to position the help appropriately.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
const wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the help event origin, only used internally by wxWidgets normally.
|
||||
@ -1710,12 +1710,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns wxHORIZONTAL or wxVERTICAL, depending on the orientation of the
|
||||
scrollbar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOrientation();
|
||||
int GetOrientation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the scrollbar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPosition();
|
||||
int GetPosition() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1783,7 +1783,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see RequestMore()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MoreRequested();
|
||||
bool MoreRequested() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tells wxWidgets that more processing is required. This function can be called
|
||||
@ -1900,25 +1900,25 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the child that has the focus, or @NULL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetCurrentFocus();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetCurrentFocus() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the navigation was in the forward direction.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetDirection();
|
||||
bool GetDirection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the navigation event was from a tab key. This is required
|
||||
for proper navigation over radio buttons.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFromTab();
|
||||
bool IsFromTab() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the navigation event represents a window change (for
|
||||
example, from Ctrl-Page Down
|
||||
in a notebook).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsWindowChange();
|
||||
bool IsWindowChange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the current focus window member.
|
||||
@ -1980,7 +1980,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the window that gained the capture, or @NULL if it was a non-wxWidgets
|
||||
window.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetCapturedWindow();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetCapturedWindow() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2035,7 +2035,7 @@ public:
|
||||
shutting down. This method can only be called for end session and query end
|
||||
session events, it doesn't make sense for close window event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetLoggingOff();
|
||||
bool GetLoggingOff() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 'can veto' flag.
|
||||
@ -2045,12 +2045,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 'force' flag.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetForce(bool force);
|
||||
void SetForce(bool force) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 'logging off' flag.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLoggingOff(bool loggingOff);
|
||||
void SetLoggingOff(bool loggingOff) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Call this from your event handler to veto a system shutdown or to signal
|
||||
@ -2093,20 +2093,20 @@ public:
|
||||
used with the @c OPEN and @c CLOSE events and even for them the
|
||||
returned pointer may be @NULL in some ports.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenu* GetMenu();
|
||||
wxMenu* GetMenu() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the menu identifier associated with the event. This method should be
|
||||
only used with the @c HIGHLIGHT events.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMenuId();
|
||||
int GetMenuId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the menu which is being opened or closed is a popup menu,
|
||||
@false if it is a normal one.
|
||||
This method should only be used with the @c OPEN and @c CLOSE events.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPopup();
|
||||
bool IsPopup() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2314,7 +2314,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClientObject(), wxClientData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject();
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event handler is enabled, @false otherwise.
|
||||
@ -2483,7 +2483,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the frame has been iconized, @false if it has been
|
||||
restored.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Iconized();
|
||||
bool Iconized() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2510,7 +2510,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the window generating the move change event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2553,7 +2553,7 @@ public:
|
||||
implementing the Clone function is to implement a copy constructor for
|
||||
a new event (call it MyEvent) and then define the Clone function like this:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxEvent* Clone();
|
||||
virtual wxEvent* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object (usually a window) associated with the
|
||||
@ -2570,12 +2570,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the identifier associated with this event, such as a button command id.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetId();
|
||||
int GetId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event handler should be skipped, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSkipped();
|
||||
bool GetSkipped() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the timestamp for the event. The timestamp is the time in milliseconds
|
||||
@ -2590,7 +2590,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxCommandEvent else it returns @false.
|
||||
Note: Exists only for optimization purposes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCommandEvent();
|
||||
bool IsCommandEvent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the propagation level to the given value (for example returned from an
|
||||
@ -2622,7 +2622,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Test if this event should be propagated or not, i.e. if the propagation level
|
||||
is currently greater than 0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ShouldPropagate();
|
||||
bool ShouldPropagate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This method can be used inside an event handler to control whether further
|
||||
@ -2704,7 +2704,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the entire size of the window generating the size change event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetSize();
|
||||
wxSize GetSize() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2736,17 +2736,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a reference to the cursor specified by this event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCursor GetCursor();
|
||||
wxCursor GetCursor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the X coordinate of the mouse in client coordinates.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCoord GetX();
|
||||
wxCoord GetX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the Y coordinate of the mouse in client coordinates.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCoord GetY();
|
||||
wxCoord GetY() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the cursor specified by this event is a valid cursor.
|
||||
@ -2754,7 +2754,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@remarks You cannot specify wxNullCursor with this event, as it is not
|
||||
considered a valid cursor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasCursor();
|
||||
bool HasCursor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the cursor associated with this event.
|
||||
|
@ -27,24 +27,24 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the pointer to the dialog which generated this event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFindReplaceDialog* GetDialog();
|
||||
wxFindReplaceDialog* GetDialog() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the string to find (never empty).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFindString();
|
||||
wxString GetFindString() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the currently selected flags: this is the combination of @c wxFR_DOWN,
|
||||
@c wxFR_WHOLEWORD and @c wxFR_MATCHCASE flags.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFlags();
|
||||
int GetFlags() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the string to replace the search string with (only for replace and
|
||||
replace all events).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetReplaceString();
|
||||
const wxString GetReplaceString() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the combination of @c wxFindReplaceFlags values.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFlags();
|
||||
int GetFlags() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the replacement string.
|
||||
@ -154,5 +154,5 @@ public:
|
||||
Get the wxFindReplaceData object used by this
|
||||
dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFindReplaceData* GetData();
|
||||
const wxFindReplaceData* GetData() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Eof();
|
||||
bool Eof() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if an error has occurred on this file, similar to the standard
|
||||
@ -101,19 +101,19 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the type of the file. Possible return values are:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileKind GetKind();
|
||||
wxFileKind GetKind() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the file is opened. Most of the methods of this class may
|
||||
only
|
||||
be used for an opened file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOpened();
|
||||
bool IsOpened() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the length of the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileOffset Length();
|
||||
wxFileOffset Length() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileOffset Tell();
|
||||
wxFileOffset Tell() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
)
|
||||
@ -188,5 +188,5 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the file pointer associated with the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
FILE* fp();
|
||||
FILE* fp() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -79,12 +79,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the file was successfully opened.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOpened();
|
||||
bool IsOpened() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the length of the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileOffset Length();
|
||||
wxFileOffset Length() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Open the temporary file, returns @true on success, @false if an error
|
||||
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
||||
another
|
||||
error occurred.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileOffset Tell();
|
||||
wxFileOffset Tell() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Write to the file, return @true on success, @false on failure.
|
||||
@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Read() repeatedly and tests its return condition instead
|
||||
of using Eof() as this will not work for special files under Unix.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Eof();
|
||||
bool Eof() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the given name specifies an existing regular file (not a
|
||||
@ -239,17 +239,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the type of the file. Possible return values are:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileKind GetKind();
|
||||
wxFileKind GetKind() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the file has been opened.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOpened();
|
||||
bool IsOpened() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the length of the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileOffset Length();
|
||||
wxFileOffset Length() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ public:
|
||||
another
|
||||
error occurred.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileOffset Tell();
|
||||
wxFileOffset Tell() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns @true on success.
|
||||
@ -319,5 +319,5 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the file descriptor associated with the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int fd();
|
||||
int fd() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -93,14 +93,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the current directory of the file control (i.e. the directory shown by
|
||||
it).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetDirectory();
|
||||
wxString GetDirectory() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently selected filename.
|
||||
For the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE style, use GetFilenames()
|
||||
instead
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFilename();
|
||||
wxString GetFilename() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fills the array @a filenames with the filenames only of selected items. This
|
||||
@ -110,19 +110,19 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks filenames is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetFilenames(wxArrayString& filenames);
|
||||
void GetFilenames(wxArrayString& filenames) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the zero-based index of the currently selected filter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFilterIndex();
|
||||
int GetFilterIndex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the full path (directory and filename) of the currently selected file.
|
||||
For the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE style, use GetPaths()
|
||||
instead
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fills the array @a paths with the full paths of the files chosen. This
|
||||
@ -131,12 +131,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks paths is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetPaths(wxArrayString& paths);
|
||||
void GetPaths(wxArrayString& paths) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current wildcard.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetWildcard();
|
||||
wxString GetWildcard() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets(changes) the current directory displayed in the control.
|
||||
@ -193,19 +193,19 @@ public:
|
||||
In case of a @b EVT_FILECTRL_FOLDERCHANGED, this method returns the new
|
||||
directory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetDirectory();
|
||||
wxString GetDirectory() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the file selected(assuming it is only one file).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFile();
|
||||
wxString GetFile() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the files selected.
|
||||
In case of a @b EVT_FILECTRL_SELECTIONCHANGED, this method returns the
|
||||
files selected after the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArrayString GetFiles();
|
||||
wxArrayString GetFiles() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the files changed by this event.
|
||||
|
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the default directory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetDirectory();
|
||||
wxString GetDirectory() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
If functions
|
||||
@ -98,12 +98,12 @@ public:
|
||||
and ShowModal() were called,
|
||||
returns the extra window. Otherwise returns @NULL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetExtraControl();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetExtraControl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the default filename.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFilename();
|
||||
wxString GetFilename() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fills the array @a filenames with the names of the files chosen. This
|
||||
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ public:
|
||||
of each referenced file by appending the directory containing the shortcuts
|
||||
to the filename.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetFilenames(wxArrayString& filenames);
|
||||
void GetFilenames(wxArrayString& filenames) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index into the list of filters supplied, optionally, in the
|
||||
@ -123,29 +123,29 @@ public:
|
||||
dialog is first displayed.
|
||||
After the dialog is shown, this is the index selected by the user.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFilterIndex();
|
||||
int GetFilterIndex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the message that will be displayed on the dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetMessage();
|
||||
wxString GetMessage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the full path (directory and filename) of the selected file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Fills the array @a paths with the full paths of the files chosen. This
|
||||
function should only be used with the dialogs which have @c wxFD_MULTIPLE style,
|
||||
use GetPath() for the others.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetPaths(wxArrayString& paths);
|
||||
void GetPaths(wxArrayString& paths) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the file dialog wildcard.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetWildcard();
|
||||
wxString GetWildcard() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the default directory.
|
||||
|
@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ public:
|
||||
to the value returned wxPathList::FindValidPath) or an
|
||||
empty string.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FindAbsoluteValidPath(const wxString& file);
|
||||
wxString FindAbsoluteValidPath(const wxString& file) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Searches the given file in all paths stored in this class.
|
||||
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ public:
|
||||
(see wxGetCwd and wxSetWorkingDirectory)
|
||||
may affect the value returned by this function!
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FindValidPath(const wxString& file);
|
||||
wxString FindValidPath(const wxString& file) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the directory with this name exists.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DirExists();
|
||||
static bool DirExists(const wxString& dir);
|
||||
const static bool DirExists(const wxString& dir);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see DirExists()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool FileExists();
|
||||
static bool FileExists(const wxString& file);
|
||||
const static bool FileExists(const wxString& file);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -344,17 +344,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of directories in the file name.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetDirCount();
|
||||
size_t GetDirCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the directories in string array form.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxArrayString GetDirs();
|
||||
const wxArrayString GetDirs() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the file name extension.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetExt();
|
||||
wxString GetExt() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the characters that can't be used in filenames and directory names for
|
||||
@ -370,12 +370,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the full name (including extension but excluding directories).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFullName();
|
||||
wxString GetFullName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the full path with name and extension.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFullPath(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
wxString GetFullPath(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the home directory.
|
||||
@ -398,27 +398,27 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetHumanReadableSize(const wxString& failmsg = "Not available",
|
||||
int precision = 1);
|
||||
static wxString GetHumanReadableSize(const wxULongLong& bytes,
|
||||
const wxString& nullsize = "Not available",
|
||||
int precision = 1);
|
||||
const static wxString GetHumanReadableSize(const wxULongLong& bytes,
|
||||
const wxString& nullsize = "Not available",
|
||||
int precision = 1);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the long form of the path (returns identity on non-Windows platforms)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLongPath();
|
||||
wxString GetLongPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the last time the file was last modified.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetModificationTime();
|
||||
wxDateTime GetModificationTime() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the name part of the filename (without extension).
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFullName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName();
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the path part of the filename (without the name or extension). The
|
||||
@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the path.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath(int flags = wxPATH_GET_VOLUME,
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the usually used path separator for this format. For all formats but
|
||||
@ -472,12 +472,12 @@ public:
|
||||
This is the same as calling GetPath()
|
||||
@c (wxPATH_GET_VOLUME | wxPATH_GET_SEPARATOR, format).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPathWithSep(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
wxString GetPathWithSep(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the short form of the path (returns identity on non-Windows platforms).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetShortPath();
|
||||
wxString GetShortPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ public:
|
||||
by another process) the returned value is @c wxInvalidSize.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxULongLong GetSize();
|
||||
static wxULongLong GetSize(const wxString& filename);
|
||||
const static wxULongLong GetSize(const wxString& filename);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -515,14 +515,14 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns @true on success, @false if we failed to retrieve the times.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTimes(wxDateTime* dtAccess, wxDateTime* dtMod,
|
||||
wxDateTime* dtCreate);
|
||||
wxDateTime* dtCreate) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string containing the volume for this file name, empty if it
|
||||
doesn't have one or if the file system doesn't support volumes at all (for
|
||||
example, Unix).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVolume();
|
||||
wxString GetVolume() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string separating the volume from the path for this format.
|
||||
@ -532,17 +532,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if an extension is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasExt();
|
||||
bool HasExt() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if a name is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasName();
|
||||
bool HasName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if a volume specifier is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasVolume();
|
||||
bool HasVolume() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts a directory component before the zero-based position in the directory
|
||||
@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ public:
|
||||
DirExists() or
|
||||
FileExists() for this.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDir();
|
||||
bool IsDir() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ public:
|
||||
doesn't imply that you have read permissions on the files contained.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDirReadable();
|
||||
static bool IsDirReadable(const wxString& dir);
|
||||
const static bool IsDirReadable(const wxString& dir);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ public:
|
||||
directory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDirWritable();
|
||||
static bool IsDirWritable(const wxString& dir);
|
||||
const static bool IsDirWritable(const wxString& dir);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ public:
|
||||
permissions on it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFileExecutable();
|
||||
static bool IsFileExecutable(const wxString& file);
|
||||
const static bool IsFileExecutable(const wxString& file);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ public:
|
||||
permissions on it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFileReadable();
|
||||
static bool IsFileReadable(const wxString& file);
|
||||
const static bool IsFileReadable(const wxString& file);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ public:
|
||||
permissions on it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFileWritable();
|
||||
static bool IsFileWritable(const wxString& file);
|
||||
const static bool IsFileWritable(const wxString& file);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Clear() may reset the object to the uninitialized,
|
||||
invalid state (the former only do it on failure).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the char is a path separator for this format.
|
||||
@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Compares the filename using the rules of this platform.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SameAs(const wxFileName& filepath,
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -981,8 +981,8 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the filenames are different. The string @e filenames
|
||||
is interpreted as a path in the native filename format.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator operator!=(const wxFileName& filename);
|
||||
bool operator operator!=(const wxString& filename);
|
||||
bool operator operator!=(const wxFileName& filename) const;
|
||||
const bool operator operator!=(const wxString& filename) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the filenames are equal. The string @e filenames is
|
||||
interpreted as a path in the native filename format.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator operator==(const wxFileName& filename);
|
||||
bool operator operator==(const wxString& filename);
|
||||
bool operator operator==(const wxFileName& filename) const;
|
||||
const bool operator operator==(const wxString& filename) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -106,12 +106,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Similar to GetPath() but returns the path of
|
||||
the currently selected file as a wxFileName object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileName GetFileName();
|
||||
wxFileName GetFileName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the absolute path of the currently selected file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This method does the same thing as SetPath() but
|
||||
@ -220,12 +220,12 @@ public:
|
||||
object.
|
||||
This function is equivalent to GetPath()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileName GetDirName();
|
||||
wxFileName GetDirName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the absolute path of the currently selected directory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Just like SetPath() but this function takes a
|
||||
@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieve the absolute path of the file/directory the user has just selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetPath();
|
||||
wxString GetPath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the absolute path of the file/directory associated with the event.
|
||||
|
@ -184,25 +184,25 @@ public:
|
||||
for example myanim.avi#200 may refer to position in animation
|
||||
or reality.wrl#MyView may refer to a predefined view in VRML.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetAnchor();
|
||||
const wxString GetAnchor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns full location of the file, including path and protocol.
|
||||
Examples :
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetLocation();
|
||||
const wxString GetLocation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the MIME type of the content of this file. It is either
|
||||
extension-based (see wxMimeTypesManager) or extracted from
|
||||
HTTP protocol Content-Type header.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetMimeType();
|
||||
const wxString GetMimeType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns time when this file was modified.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetModificationTime();
|
||||
wxDateTime GetModificationTime() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to the stream. You can use the returned
|
||||
@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ public:
|
||||
this by default. wxHtml uses local cache to work around
|
||||
this and to speed up the connection).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxInputStream* GetStream();
|
||||
wxInputStream* GetStream() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -282,14 +282,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Example: GetAnchor("index.htm#chapter2") == "chapter2"
|
||||
@b Note: the anchor is NOT part of the left location.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAnchor(const wxString& location);
|
||||
wxString GetAnchor(const wxString& location) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the left location string extracted from @e location.
|
||||
Example: GetLeftLocation("file:myzipfile.zip#zip:index.htm") ==
|
||||
"file:myzipfile.zip"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetLeftLocation(const wxString& location);
|
||||
wxString GetLeftLocation(const wxString& location) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the MIME type based on @b extension of @e location. (While
|
||||
@ -303,13 +303,13 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the protocol string extracted from @e location.
|
||||
Example: GetProtocol("file:myzipfile.zip#zip:index.htm") == "zip"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetProtocol(const wxString& location);
|
||||
wxString GetProtocol(const wxString& location) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the right location string extracted from @e location.
|
||||
Example : GetRightLocation("file:myzipfile.zip#zip:index.htm") == "index.htm"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetRightLocation(const wxString& location);
|
||||
wxString GetRightLocation(const wxString& location) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file and returns wxFSFile pointer or @NULL if failed.
|
||||
|
@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFaceName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFaceName();
|
||||
wxString GetFaceName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font family. See SetFamily() for a list of valid
|
||||
@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFamily()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontFamily GetFamily();
|
||||
wxFontFamily GetFamily() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the platform-dependent string completely describing this font.
|
||||
@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfo(),GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoDesc();
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoDesc() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a user-friendly string for this font object. Returned string is always
|
||||
@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetPointSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPointSize();
|
||||
int GetPointSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font style. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
@ -347,14 +347,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStyle();
|
||||
int GetStyle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the font is underlined, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUnderlined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUnderlined();
|
||||
bool GetUnderlined() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font weight. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
@ -362,18 +362,18 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetWeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontWeight GetWeight();
|
||||
wxFontWeight GetWeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the font is a fixed width (or monospaced) font,
|
||||
@false if it is a proportional one or font is invalid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFixedWidth();
|
||||
bool IsFixedWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this object is a valid font, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ public:
|
||||
dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFontData GetFontData();
|
||||
wxFontData GetFontData();
|
||||
const wxFontData& GetFontData();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -91,13 +91,13 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum point size value allowed for the user-chosen font.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetMaxPointSize();
|
||||
unsigned int GetMaxPointSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently selected font.
|
||||
Note that this function is completely different from wxWindow::GetFont.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetSelectedFont();
|
||||
wxFont GetSelectedFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the maximum point size value allowed for the user-chosen font.
|
||||
@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieve the font the user has just selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the font associated with the event.
|
||||
|
@ -214,14 +214,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the origin of the frame client area (in client coordinates). It may be
|
||||
different from (0, 0) if the frame has a toolbar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetClientAreaOrigin();
|
||||
wxPoint GetClientAreaOrigin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the menubar currently associated with the frame (if any).
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMenuBar(), wxMenuBar, wxMenu
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuBar* GetMenuBar();
|
||||
wxMenuBar* GetMenuBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the status bar currently associated with the frame (if
|
||||
@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxStatusBar* GetStatusBar();
|
||||
wxStatusBar* GetStatusBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the status bar pane used to display menu and toolbar help.
|
||||
@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateToolBar(), wxToolBar, SetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxToolBar* GetToolBar();
|
||||
wxToolBar* GetToolBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Virtual function called when a status bar is requested by CreateStatusBar().
|
||||
|
@ -100,14 +100,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBezelFace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBezelFace();
|
||||
int GetBezelFace() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetRange()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRange();
|
||||
int GetRange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the 3D shadow margin width.
|
||||
@ -116,20 +116,20 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetShadowWidth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetShadowWidth();
|
||||
int GetShadowWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetValue();
|
||||
int GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the gauge is vertical (has @c wxGA_VERTICAL style) and
|
||||
@false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsVertical();
|
||||
bool IsVertical() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Switch the gauge to indeterminate mode (if required) and makes the gauge move
|
||||
|
@ -31,12 +31,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the current column value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCol();
|
||||
int GetCol() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the current row value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRow();
|
||||
int GetRow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set a new column value.
|
||||
@ -51,12 +51,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Is the wxGBPosition valid? (An invalid wxGBPosition is (-1,-1). )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator!(const wxGBPosition& p);
|
||||
bool operator!(const wxGBPosition& p) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Compare equality of two wxGBPositions.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator operator==(const wxGBPosition& p);
|
||||
bool operator operator==(const wxGBPosition& p) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -160,12 +160,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Get the size of the specified cell, including hgap and vgap. Only
|
||||
valid after a Layout.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetCellSize(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxSize GetCellSize(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the size used for cells in the grid with no item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetEmptyCellSize();
|
||||
wxSize GetEmptyCellSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -265,16 +265,16 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the grid position of the item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGBPosition GetPos();
|
||||
void GetPos(int& row, int& col);
|
||||
wxGBPosition GetPos() const;
|
||||
const void GetPos(int& row, int& col) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the row and column spanning of the item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGBSpan GetSpan();
|
||||
void GetSpan(int& rowspan, int& colspan);
|
||||
wxGBSpan GetSpan() const;
|
||||
const void GetSpan(int& rowspan, int& colspan) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -330,12 +330,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the current colspan value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColspan();
|
||||
int GetColspan() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the current rowspan value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowspan();
|
||||
int GetRowspan() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set a new colspan value.
|
||||
@ -350,10 +350,10 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Is the wxGBSpan valid? (An invalid wxGBSpan is (-1,-1). )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator!(const wxGBSpan& o);
|
||||
bool operator!(const wxGBSpan& o) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Compare equality of two wxGBSpans.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool operator operator==(const wxGBSpan& o);
|
||||
bool operator operator==(const wxGBSpan& o) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ public:
|
||||
@c wxHORIZONTAL flag, then it is only centered in this direction while
|
||||
the other component of its position remains unchanged.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect CentreIn(const wxRect& r, int dir = wxBOTH);
|
||||
wxRect CenterIn(const wxRect& r, int dir = wxBOTH);
|
||||
wxRect CentreIn(const wxRect& r, int dir = wxBOTH) const;
|
||||
const wxRect CenterIn(const wxRect& r, int dir = wxBOTH) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -79,9 +79,9 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the given rectangle is completely inside this rectangle
|
||||
(or touches its boundary) and @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Contains(int x, int y);
|
||||
bool Contains(const wxPoint& pt);
|
||||
bool Contains(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
bool Contains(int x, int y) const;
|
||||
const bool Contains(const wxPoint& pt) const;
|
||||
const bool Contains(const wxRect& rect) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -93,84 +93,84 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see Inflate()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Deflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy);
|
||||
void Deflate(const wxSize& diff);
|
||||
void Deflate(wxCoord diff);
|
||||
wxRect Deflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy);
|
||||
void Deflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) const;
|
||||
void Deflate(const wxSize& diff) const;
|
||||
void Deflate(wxCoord diff) const;
|
||||
wxRect Deflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the bottom point of the rectangle.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBottom();
|
||||
int GetBottom() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the position of the bottom left corner.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetBottomLeft();
|
||||
wxPoint GetBottomLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the position of the bottom right corner.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetBottomRight();
|
||||
wxPoint GetBottomRight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the height member.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetHeight();
|
||||
int GetHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the left point of the rectangle (the same as wxRect::GetX).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetLeft();
|
||||
int GetLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the right point of the rectangle.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRight();
|
||||
int GetRight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the size.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetSize();
|
||||
wxSize GetSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the top point of the rectangle (the same as wxRect::GetY).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetTop();
|
||||
int GetTop() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the position of the top left corner of the rectangle, same as
|
||||
GetPosition().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetTopLeft();
|
||||
wxPoint GetTopLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the position of the top right corner.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetTopRight();
|
||||
wxPoint GetTopRight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width member.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the x member.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetX();
|
||||
int GetX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the y member.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetY();
|
||||
int GetY() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -202,10 +202,10 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see Deflate()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Inflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy);
|
||||
void Inflate(const wxSize& diff);
|
||||
void Inflate(wxCoord diff);
|
||||
wxRect Inflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy);
|
||||
void Inflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) const;
|
||||
void Inflate(const wxSize& diff) const;
|
||||
void Inflate(wxCoord diff) const;
|
||||
wxRect Inflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -215,20 +215,20 @@ public:
|
||||
other one modifies this rectangle in place.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect Intersect(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
wxRect Intersect(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
const wxRect& Intersect(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this rectangle has a non-empty intersection with the
|
||||
rectangle @a rect and @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Intersects(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
bool Intersects(const wxRect& rect) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this rectangle has a width or height less than or equal to
|
||||
0 and @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty();
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ public:
|
||||
other one modifies this rectangle in place.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect Union(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
wxRect Union(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
const wxRect& Union(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Finds a colour name given the colour. Returns an empty string if the colour is
|
||||
not found in the database.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString FindName(const wxColour& colour);
|
||||
wxString FindName(const wxColour& colour) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -574,12 +574,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the height member.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetHeight();
|
||||
int GetHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width member.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This method is typically used before calling
|
||||
SetDefaults().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFullySpecified();
|
||||
bool IsFullySpecified() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -107,33 +107,33 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the point is within the path.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Contains(const wxPoint2DDouble& c,
|
||||
int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE);
|
||||
bool Contains(wxDouble x, wxDouble y,
|
||||
int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE);
|
||||
int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE) const;
|
||||
const bool Contains(wxDouble x, wxDouble y,
|
||||
int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the bounding box enclosing all points (possibly including control points).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect2DDouble GetBox();
|
||||
void GetBox(wxDouble* x, wxDouble* y, wxDouble* w,
|
||||
wxDouble* h);
|
||||
wxRect2DDouble GetBox() const;
|
||||
const void GetBox(wxDouble* x, wxDouble* y, wxDouble* w,
|
||||
wxDouble* h) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the last point of the current path, (0,0) if not yet set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetCurrentPoint(wxDouble* x, wxDouble* y);
|
||||
wxPoint2DDouble GetCurrentPoint();
|
||||
void GetCurrentPoint(wxDouble* x, wxDouble* y) const;
|
||||
const wxPoint2DDouble GetCurrentPoint() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the native path (CGPathRef for Core Graphics, Path pointer for GDIPlus
|
||||
and a cairo_path_t pointer for cairo).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetNativePath();
|
||||
void* GetNativePath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ public:
|
||||
some deallocations necessary (eg on cairo the native path returned by
|
||||
GetNativePath is newly allocated each time).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UnGetNativePath(void* p);
|
||||
void UnGetNativePath(void* p) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -177,12 +177,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the renderer that was used to create this instance, or @NULL if it has
|
||||
not been initialized yet
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsRenderer* GetRenderer();
|
||||
wxGraphicsRenderer* GetRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Is this object valid (@false) or still empty (@true)?
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsNull();
|
||||
bool IsNull() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -230,13 +230,13 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a native brush from a wxBrush.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsBrush CreateBrush(const wxBrush& brush);
|
||||
wxGraphicsBrush CreateBrush(const wxBrush& brush) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a native graphics font from a wxFont and a text colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsFont CreateFont(const wxFont& font,
|
||||
const wxColour& col = wxBLACK);
|
||||
const wxColour& col = wxBLACK) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a native context. This native context must be
|
||||
@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxDouble x2,
|
||||
wxDouble y2,
|
||||
const wxColouramp;c1,
|
||||
const wxColouramp;c2);
|
||||
const wxColouramp;c2) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a native affine transformation matrix from the passed in values. The
|
||||
@ -273,17 +273,17 @@ public:
|
||||
wxDouble c = 0.0,
|
||||
wxDouble d = 1.0,
|
||||
wxDouble tx = 0.0,
|
||||
wxDouble ty = 0.0);
|
||||
wxDouble ty = 0.0) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a native graphics path which is initially empty.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsPath CreatePath();
|
||||
wxGraphicsPath CreatePath() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a native pen from a wxPen.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsPen CreatePen(const wxPen& pen);
|
||||
wxGraphicsPen CreatePen(const wxPen& pen) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a native brush, having a radial gradient originating at (xo,yc) with
|
||||
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ public:
|
||||
wxDouble yc,
|
||||
wxDouble radius,
|
||||
const wxColour& oColor,
|
||||
const wxColour& cColor);
|
||||
const wxColour& cColor) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws the bitmap. In case of a mono bitmap, this is treated as a mask and the
|
||||
@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@a text to the corresponding character of @e text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetPartialTextExtents(const wxString& text,
|
||||
wxArrayDouble& widths);
|
||||
wxArrayDouble& widths) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the dimensions of the string using the currently selected font.
|
||||
@ -379,12 +379,12 @@ public:
|
||||
void GetTextExtent(const wxString& text, wxDouble* width,
|
||||
wxDouble* height,
|
||||
wxDouble* descent,
|
||||
wxDouble* externalLeading);
|
||||
wxDouble* externalLeading) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the current transformation matrix of this context.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsMatrix GetTransform();
|
||||
wxGraphicsMatrix GetTransform() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Resets the clipping to original shape.
|
||||
@ -623,13 +623,13 @@ public:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Get(wxDouble* a = NULL, wxDouble* b = NULL, wxDouble* c = NULL,
|
||||
wxDouble* d = NULL, wxDouble* tx = NULL,
|
||||
wxDouble* ty = NULL);
|
||||
wxDouble* ty = NULL) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the native representation of the matrix. For CoreGraphics this is a
|
||||
CFAffineMatrix pointer. For GDIPlus a Matrix Pointer and for Cairo a cairo_matrix_t pointer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetNativeMatrix();
|
||||
void* GetNativeMatrix() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inverts the matrix.
|
||||
@ -639,12 +639,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the elements of the transformation matrix are equal.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEqual(const wxGraphicsMatrix& t);
|
||||
bool IsEqual(const wxGraphicsMatrix& t) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return @true if this is the identity matrix.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsIdentity();
|
||||
bool IsIdentity() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Rotates this matrix (radians).
|
||||
@ -668,12 +668,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Applies this matrix to a distance (ie. performs all transforms except
|
||||
translations)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void TransformDistance(wxDouble* dx, wxDouble* dy);
|
||||
void TransformDistance(wxDouble* dx, wxDouble* dy) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Applies this matrix to a point.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void TransformPoint(wxDouble* x, wxDouble* y);
|
||||
void TransformPoint(wxDouble* x, wxDouble* y) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Translates this matrix.
|
||||
|
228
interface/grid.h
228
interface/grid.h
@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the precision ( see @ref constr() wxGridCellFloatRenderer ).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPrecision();
|
||||
int GetPrecision() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the width ( see @ref constr() wxGridCellFloatRenderer ).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Parameters string format is "width[,precision]".
|
||||
@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
get the currently used attr provider (may be @NULL)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellAttrProvider* GetAttrProvider();
|
||||
wxGridCellAttrProvider* GetAttrProvider() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGrid* GetView();
|
||||
wxGrid* GetView() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -219,9 +219,9 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetColAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
, @b const@e wxString)
|
||||
, @e wxString)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetColLabelValue();
|
||||
void SetColLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -229,9 +229,9 @@ public:
|
||||
void SetRowAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int row);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
, @b const@e wxString)
|
||||
, @e wxString)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRowLabelValue();
|
||||
void SetRowLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Create a new object which is the copy of this one.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* Clone();
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the actual edit control.
|
||||
@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* Clone();
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draw the given cell on the provided DC inside the given rectangle
|
||||
@ -685,13 +685,13 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
String representation of the value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetString();
|
||||
wxString GetString() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
If the return value is @true, the editor uses a wxSpinCtrl to get user input,
|
||||
otherwise it uses a wxTextCtrl.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasRange();
|
||||
bool HasRange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Parameters string format is "min,max".
|
||||
@ -810,7 +810,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a new copy of this object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* Clone();
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@ -820,62 +820,62 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
See SetAlignment() for the returned values.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetAlignment(int* hAlign, int* vAlign);
|
||||
void GetAlignment(int* hAlign, int* vAlign) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour();
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetEditor(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col);
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetEditor(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetRenderer(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col);
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetRenderer(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour();
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasAlignment();
|
||||
bool HasAlignment() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour();
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasEditor();
|
||||
bool HasEditor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasFont();
|
||||
bool HasFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasRenderer();
|
||||
bool HasRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
accessors
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasTextColour();
|
||||
bool HasTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This class is ref counted: it is created with ref count of 1, so
|
||||
@ -887,7 +887,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly();
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the alignment. @a hAlign can be one of @c wxALIGN_LEFT,
|
||||
@ -1242,14 +1242,14 @@ public:
|
||||
to the client size of the grid window.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect BlockToDeviceRect(const wxGridCellCoords& topLeft,
|
||||
const wxGridCellCoords& bottomRight);
|
||||
const wxGridCellCoords& bottomRight) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if columns can be moved by dragging with the mouse. Columns can be
|
||||
moved
|
||||
by dragging on their labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanDragColMove();
|
||||
bool CanDragColMove() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if columns can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Columns can
|
||||
@ -1259,13 +1259,13 @@ public:
|
||||
resized by dragging the right edge of the column in the grid cell area
|
||||
(see wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanDragColSize();
|
||||
bool CanDragColSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return @true if the dragging of grid lines to resize rows and columns is enabled
|
||||
or @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanDragGridSize();
|
||||
bool CanDragGridSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if rows can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Rows can be
|
||||
@ -1275,19 +1275,19 @@ public:
|
||||
resized by dragging the lower edge of the row in the grid cell area
|
||||
(see wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanDragRowSize();
|
||||
bool CanDragRowSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the in-place edit control for the current grid cell can be used
|
||||
and
|
||||
@false otherwise (e.g. if the current cell is read-only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanEnableCellControl();
|
||||
bool CanEnableCellControl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Do we have some place to store attributes in?
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanHaveAttributes();
|
||||
bool CanHaveAttributes() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableDragRowSize()
|
||||
@ -1324,8 +1324,8 @@ public:
|
||||
logical
|
||||
coordinates.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect CellToRect(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxRect CellToRect(const wxGridCellCoords& coords);
|
||||
wxRect CellToRect(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
const wxRect CellToRect(const wxGridCellCoords& coords) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ public:
|
||||
without (yet) matching calls to EndBatch(). While
|
||||
the grid's batch count is greater than zero the display will not be updated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBatchCount();
|
||||
int GetBatchCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the arguments to the horizontal and vertical text alignment values for the
|
||||
@ -1531,12 +1531,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetCellAlignment(int row, int col, int* horiz, int* vert);
|
||||
void GetCellAlignment(int row, int col, int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the background colour of the cell at the specified location.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetCellBackgroundColour(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxColour GetCellBackgroundColour(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the editor for the cell at the specified location.
|
||||
@ -1544,12 +1544,12 @@ public:
|
||||
the @ref overview_gridoverview "wxGrid overview" for more information about
|
||||
cell editors and renderers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetCellEditor(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetCellEditor(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the font for text in the grid cell at the specified location.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetCellFont(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxFont GetCellFont(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the renderer for the grid cell at the specified location.
|
||||
@ -1557,12 +1557,12 @@ public:
|
||||
the @ref overview_gridoverview "wxGrid overview" for more information about
|
||||
cell editors and renderers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetCellRenderer(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetCellRenderer(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the text colour for the grid cell at the specified location.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetCellTextColour(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxColour GetCellTextColour(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -1579,14 +1579,14 @@ public:
|
||||
See wxGridTableBase::CanGetValueAs
|
||||
and the @ref overview_gridoverview "wxGrid overview" for more information.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetCellValue(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxString GetCellValue(const wxGridCellCoords& coords);
|
||||
wxString GetCellValue(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
const wxString GetCellValue(const wxGridCellCoords& coords) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the column ID of the specified column position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColAt(int colPos);
|
||||
int GetColAt(int colPos) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the pen used for vertical grid lines. This virtual function may be
|
||||
@ -1603,12 +1603,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetColLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert);
|
||||
void GetColLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current height of the column labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColLabelSize();
|
||||
int GetColLabelSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the specified column label. The default grid table class provides
|
||||
@ -1618,39 +1618,39 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridTableBase::GetColLabelValue to provide
|
||||
your own labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col);
|
||||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColLeft(int col);
|
||||
int GetColLeft(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This returns the value of the lowest column width that can be handled
|
||||
correctly. See
|
||||
member SetColMinimalAcceptableWidth() for details.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColMinimalAcceptableWidth();
|
||||
int GetColMinimalAcceptableWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the minimal width of the given column/row.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColMinimalWidth(int col);
|
||||
int GetColMinimalWidth(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the specified column.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColPos(int colID);
|
||||
int GetColPos(int colID) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColRight(int col);
|
||||
int GetColRight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the width of the specified column.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColSize(int col);
|
||||
int GetColSize(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the arguments to the current default horizontal and vertical text alignment
|
||||
@ -1660,32 +1660,32 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetDefaultCellAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert);
|
||||
void GetDefaultCellAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default background colour for grid cells.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetDefaultCellBackgroundColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetDefaultCellBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default font for grid cell text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetDefaultCellFont();
|
||||
wxFont GetDefaultCellFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default colour for grid cell text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetDefaultCellTextColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetDefaultCellTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the default height for column labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDefaultColLabelSize();
|
||||
int GetDefaultColLabelSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default width for grid columns.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDefaultColSize();
|
||||
int GetDefaultColSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the current default grid cell editor.
|
||||
@ -1693,20 +1693,20 @@ public:
|
||||
the @ref overview_gridoverview "wxGrid overview" for more information about
|
||||
cell editors and renderers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditor();
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(const wxGridCellCoords& c);
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
const wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(const wxGridCellCoords& c) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForType(const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the pen used for grid lines. This virtual function may be overridden in
|
||||
@ -1723,77 +1723,77 @@ public:
|
||||
the @ref overview_gridoverview "wxGrid overview" for more information about
|
||||
cell editors and renderers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRenderer();
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForCell(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForType(const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the default width for the row labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDefaultRowLabelSize();
|
||||
int GetDefaultRowLabelSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default height for grid rows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDefaultRowSize();
|
||||
int GetDefaultRowSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current grid cell column position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetGridCursorCol();
|
||||
int GetGridCursorCol() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current grid cell row position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetGridCursorRow();
|
||||
int GetGridCursorRow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used for grid lines.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDefaultGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetGridLineColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetGridLineColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used for the background of row and column labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetLabelBackgroundColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetLabelBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the font used for row and column labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetLabelFont();
|
||||
wxFont GetLabelFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used for row and column label text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetLabelTextColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetLabelTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the total number of grid columns (actually the number of columns in the
|
||||
underlying grid
|
||||
table).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberCols();
|
||||
int GetNumberCols() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the total number of grid rows (actually the number of rows in the
|
||||
underlying grid table).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberRows();
|
||||
int GetNumberRows() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* GetOrCreateCellAttr(int row, int col);
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* GetOrCreateCellAttr(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the pen used for horizontal grid lines. This virtual function may be
|
||||
@ -1809,12 +1809,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxTOP, wxCENTRE or wxBOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetRowLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert);
|
||||
void GetRowLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current width of the row labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowLabelSize();
|
||||
int GetRowLabelSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the specified row label. The default grid table class provides numeric
|
||||
@ -1823,90 +1823,90 @@ public:
|
||||
wxGridTableBase::GetRowLabelValue to provide
|
||||
your own labels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetRowLabelValue(int row);
|
||||
wxString GetRowLabelValue(int row) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This returns the value of the lowest row width that can be handled correctly.
|
||||
See
|
||||
member SetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight() for details.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight();
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalHeight(int col);
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalHeight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the height of the specified row.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowSize(int row);
|
||||
int GetRowSize(int row) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per horizontal scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineX();
|
||||
int GetScrollLineX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per vertical scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineY();
|
||||
int GetScrollLineY() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns an array of singly selected cells.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectedCells();
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectedCells() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns an array of selected cols.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetSelectedCols();
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetSelectedCols() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns an array of selected rows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetSelectedRows();
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetSelectedRows() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Access or update the selection fore/back colours
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectionBackground();
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectionBackground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns an array of the bottom right corners of blocks of selected cells,
|
||||
see GetSelectionBlockTopLeft().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectionBlockBottomRight();
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectionBlockBottomRight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns an array of the top left corners of blocks of selected cells,
|
||||
see GetSelectionBlockBottomRight().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectionBlockTopLeft();
|
||||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectionBlockTopLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectionForeground();
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectionForeground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current selection mode, see SetSelectionMode().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGrid::wxGridSelectionModes GetSelectionMode();
|
||||
wxGrid::wxGridSelectionModes GetSelectionMode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a base pointer to the current table object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridTableBase* GetTable();
|
||||
wxGridTableBase* GetTable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returned number of whole cols visible.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetViewWidth();
|
||||
int GetViewWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableGridLines()
|
||||
@ -1928,7 +1928,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if drawing of grid lines is turned on, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GridLinesEnabled();
|
||||
bool GridLinesEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hides the in-place cell edit control.
|
||||
@ -2002,39 +2002,39 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the in-place edit control is currently enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCellEditControlEnabled();
|
||||
bool IsCellEditControlEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the current cell has been set to read-only
|
||||
(see wxGrid::SetReadOnly).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCurrentCellReadOnly();
|
||||
bool IsCurrentCellReadOnly() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @false if the whole grid has been set as read-only or @true otherwise.
|
||||
See EnableEditing() for more information about
|
||||
controlling the editing status of grid cells.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEditable();
|
||||
bool IsEditable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Is this cell currently selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsInSelection(int row, int col);
|
||||
bool IsInSelection(const wxGridCellCoords& coords);
|
||||
bool IsInSelection(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
const bool IsInSelection(const wxGridCellCoords& coords) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the cell at the specified location can't be edited.
|
||||
See also IsReadOnly().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly(int row, int col);
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if there are currently rows, columns or blocks of cells selected.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSelection();
|
||||
bool IsSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -2042,9 +2042,9 @@ public:
|
||||
partially
|
||||
visible in the grid window.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsVisible(int row, int col, bool wholeCellVisible = true);
|
||||
bool IsVisible(const wxGridCellCoords& coords,
|
||||
bool wholeCellVisible = true);
|
||||
bool IsVisible(int row, int col, bool wholeCellVisible = true) const;
|
||||
const bool IsVisible(const wxGridCellCoords& coords,
|
||||
bool wholeCellVisible = true) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -2261,7 +2261,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This function returns the rectangle that encloses the selected cells
|
||||
in device coords and clipped to the client size of the grid window.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect SelectionToDeviceRect();
|
||||
wxRect SelectionToDeviceRect() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -2685,26 +2685,26 @@ public:
|
||||
If @true, rather than returning wxNOT_FOUND, it returns either the first or
|
||||
last column depending on whether x is too far to the left or right respectively.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int XToCol(int x, bool clipToMinMax = false);
|
||||
int XToCol(int x, bool clipToMinMax = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the column whose right hand edge is close to the given logical x
|
||||
position.
|
||||
If no column edge is near to this position @c wxNOT_FOUND is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int XToEdgeOfCol(int x);
|
||||
int XToEdgeOfCol(int x) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the row whose bottom edge is close to the given logical y position.
|
||||
If no row edge is near to this position @c wxNOT_FOUND is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int YToEdgeOfRow(int y);
|
||||
int YToEdgeOfRow(int y) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the grid row that corresponds to the logical y coordinate. Returns
|
||||
@c wxNOT_FOUND if there is no row at the y position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int YToRow(int y);
|
||||
int YToRow(int y) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2737,13 +2737,13 @@ public:
|
||||
static bool IsTrueValue(const wxString& value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
, @b const wxString&@e valueFalse = _T(""))
|
||||
, wxString&@e valueFalse = _T(""))
|
||||
This method allows to customize the values returned by GetValue() method for
|
||||
the cell using this editor. By default, the default values of the arguments are
|
||||
used, i.e. @c "1" is returned if the cell is checked and an empty string
|
||||
otherwise, using this method allows to change this.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void UseStringValues();
|
||||
static void UseStringValues() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of elements in the hash table.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetCount();
|
||||
size_t GetCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Makes an integer key out of a string. An application may wish to make a key
|
||||
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Please remember that hash maps do not guarantee ordering.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const_iterator begin();
|
||||
iterator begin();
|
||||
const iterator begin();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -47,12 +47,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Counts the number of elements with the given key present in the map.
|
||||
This function returns only 0 or 1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_type count(const key_type& key);
|
||||
size_type count(const key_type& key) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the hash map does not contain any elements, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
bool empty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Please remember that hash maps do not guarantee ordering.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const_iterator end();
|
||||
iterator end();
|
||||
const iterator end();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -79,8 +79,8 @@ public:
|
||||
an iterator pointing at that element, otherwise an invalid iterator
|
||||
is returned (i.e. hashmap.find( non_existent_key ) == hashmap.end()).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
iterator find(const key_type& key);
|
||||
const_iterator find(const key_type& key);
|
||||
iterator find(const key_type& key) const;
|
||||
const_iterator find(const key_type& key) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -101,5 +101,5 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of elements in the map.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_type size();
|
||||
size_type size() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Please remember that hash sets do not guarantee ordering.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const_iterator begin();
|
||||
iterator begin();
|
||||
const iterator begin();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -47,12 +47,12 @@ public:
|
||||
Counts the number of elements with the given key present in the set.
|
||||
This function returns only 0 or 1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_type count(const key_type& key);
|
||||
size_type count(const key_type& key) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the hash set does not contain any elements, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
bool empty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Please remember that hash sets do not guarantee ordering.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const_iterator end();
|
||||
iterator end();
|
||||
const iterator end();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -79,8 +79,8 @@ public:
|
||||
an iterator pointing at that element, otherwise an invalid iterator
|
||||
is returned (i.e. hashset.find( non_existent_key ) == hashset.end()).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
iterator find(const key_type& key);
|
||||
const_iterator find(const key_type& key);
|
||||
iterator find(const key_type& key) const;
|
||||
const_iterator find(const key_type& key) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -94,5 +94,5 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of elements in the set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_type size();
|
||||
size_type size() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ public:
|
||||
used
|
||||
by wxCHMHelpController, wxWinHelpController and wxHtmlHelpController.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetParentWindow();
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetParentWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the help controller associated with the dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController* GetController();
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController* GetController() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads the user's settings for this dialog see
|
||||
|
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the help controller associated with the frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController* GetController();
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController* GetController() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Reads the user's settings for this frame see
|
||||
|
@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns descent value of the cell (m_Descent member).
|
||||
See explanation:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDescent();
|
||||
int GetDescent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to the first cell in the list.
|
||||
@ -193,12 +193,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns height of the cell (m_Height member).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetHeight();
|
||||
int GetHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns unique cell identifier if there is any, empty string otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxString GetId();
|
||||
virtual wxString GetId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns hypertext link if associated with this cell or @NULL otherwise.
|
||||
@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ public:
|
||||
These coordinates are used e.g. by COLORMAP. Values are relative to the
|
||||
upper left corner of THIS cell (i.e. from 0 to m_Width or m_Height)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxHtmlLinkInfo* GetLink(int x = 0, int y = 0);
|
||||
virtual wxHtmlLinkInfo* GetLink(int x = 0, int y = 0) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns cursor to show when mouse pointer is over the cell.
|
||||
@ -224,31 +224,31 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns pointer to the next cell in list (see htmlcell.h if you're
|
||||
interested in details).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHtmlCell* GetNext();
|
||||
wxHtmlCell* GetNext() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to parent container.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHtmlContainerCell* GetParent();
|
||||
wxHtmlContainerCell* GetParent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns X position within parent (the value is relative to parent's
|
||||
upper left corner). The returned value is meaningful only if
|
||||
parent's Layout() was called before!
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPosX();
|
||||
int GetPosX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns Y position within parent (the value is relative to parent's
|
||||
upper left corner). The returned value is meaningful only if
|
||||
parent's Layout() was called before!
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPosY();
|
||||
int GetPosY() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns width of the cell (m_Width member).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This method performs two actions:
|
||||
@ -336,12 +336,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns container's horizontal alignment.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAlignHor();
|
||||
int GetAlignHor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns container's vertical alignment.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAlignVer();
|
||||
int GetAlignVer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the background colour of the container or @c wxNullColour if no
|
||||
@ -357,13 +357,13 @@ public:
|
||||
value.
|
||||
It is NOT always in pixels!
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetIndent(int ind);
|
||||
int GetIndent(int ind) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the units of indentation for @a ind where @a ind is one
|
||||
of the @b wxHTML_INDENT_* constants.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetIndentUnits(int ind);
|
||||
int GetIndentUnits(int ind) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Inserts new cell into the container.
|
||||
|
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ public:
|
||||
reference to it is parent parser it can easily request the file by
|
||||
calling
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileSystem* GetFS();
|
||||
wxFileSystem* GetFS() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns product of parsing. Returned value is result of parsing
|
||||
|
@ -33,35 +33,35 @@ public:
|
||||
Example : tag contains @c FONT SIZE=+2 COLOR="#000000". Call to
|
||||
tag.GetAllParams() would return @c SIZE=+2 COLOR="#000000".
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetAllParams();
|
||||
const wxString GetAllParams() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns beginning position of the text @e between this tag and paired
|
||||
ending tag.
|
||||
See explanation (returned position is marked with '|'):
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBeginPos();
|
||||
int GetBeginPos() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns ending position of the text @e between this tag and paired
|
||||
ending tag.
|
||||
See explanation (returned position is marked with '|'):
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetEndPos1();
|
||||
int GetEndPos1() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns ending position 2 of the text @e between this tag and paired
|
||||
ending tag.
|
||||
See explanation (returned position is marked with '|'):
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetEndPos2();
|
||||
int GetEndPos2() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns tag's name. The name is always in uppercase and it doesn't contain
|
||||
'' or '/' characters. (So the name of @c FONT SIZE=+2 tag is "FONT"
|
||||
and name of @c /table is "TABLE")
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName();
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the value of the parameter. You should check whether the
|
||||
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@param with_quotes
|
||||
@true if you want to get quotes as well. See example.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetParam(const wxString& par, bool with_quotes = false);
|
||||
wxString GetParam(const wxString& par, bool with_quotes = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Interprets tag parameter @a par as colour specification and saves its value
|
||||
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true on success and @false if @a par is not colour specification or
|
||||
if the tag has no such parameter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetParamAsColour(const wxString& par, wxColour* clr);
|
||||
bool GetParamAsColour(const wxString& par, wxColour* clr) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Interprets tag parameter @a par as an integer and saves its value
|
||||
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true on success and @false if @a par is not an integer or
|
||||
if the tag has no such parameter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetParamAsInt(const wxString& par, int* value);
|
||||
bool GetParamAsInt(const wxString& par, int* value) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this tag is paired with ending tag, @false otherwise.
|
||||
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ public:
|
||||
doesn't have ending tag while the second P has. The third P tag (which
|
||||
is ending itself) of course doesn't have ending tag.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasEnding();
|
||||
bool HasEnding() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the tag has a parameter of the given name.
|
||||
@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@param par
|
||||
the parameter you're looking for.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasParam(const wxString& par);
|
||||
bool HasParam(const wxString& par) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This method scans the given parameter. Usage is exactly the same as sscanf's
|
||||
@ -125,5 +125,5 @@ public:
|
||||
pointer to a variable to store the value in
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString ScanParam(const wxString& par, const wxChar* format,
|
||||
void* value);
|
||||
void* value) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ public:
|
||||
See also: @ref overview_cells "Cells Overview",
|
||||
@ref overview_printing
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHtmlContainerCell* GetInternalRepresentation();
|
||||
wxHtmlContainerCell* GetInternalRepresentation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns anchor within currently opened page
|
||||
@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the related frame.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFrame* GetRelatedFrame();
|
||||
wxFrame* GetRelatedFrame() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Moves back to the previous page. (each page displayed using
|
||||
@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the wxHtmlLinkInfo which contains info about the cell clicked and the
|
||||
hyperlink it contains.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxHtmlLinkInfo GetLinkInfo();
|
||||
const wxHtmlLinkInfo GetLinkInfo() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -442,19 +442,19 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the wxHtmlCellEvent associated with the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHtmlCell* GetCell();
|
||||
wxHtmlCell* GetCell() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if @ref setlinkclicked() SetLinkClicked(@true) has previously
|
||||
been called;
|
||||
@false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetLinkClicked();
|
||||
bool GetLinkClicked() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the wxPoint associated with the event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPoint();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPoint() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Call this function with @c linkclicked set to @true if the cell which has
|
||||
|
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the parent window for dialogs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxWindow* GetParentWindow();
|
||||
wxWindow* GetParentWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to wxPrintData instance used by this class. You can
|
||||
|
@ -115,12 +115,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns actual text colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetActualColor();
|
||||
const wxColour GetActualColor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns default horizontal alignment.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAlign();
|
||||
int GetAlign() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns (average) char height in standard font. It is used as DC-independent
|
||||
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@b Note: This function doesn't return the @e actual height. If you want to
|
||||
know the height of the current font, call @c GetDC - GetCharHeight().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCharHeight();
|
||||
int GetCharHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns average char width in standard font. It is used as DC-independent
|
||||
@ -136,13 +136,13 @@ public:
|
||||
@b Note: This function doesn't return the @e actual width. If you want to
|
||||
know the height of the current font, call @c GetDC - GetCharWidth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCharWidth();
|
||||
int GetCharWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to the currently opened container (see Overview).
|
||||
Common use:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHtmlContainerCell* GetContainer();
|
||||
wxHtmlContainerCell* GetContainer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to the DC used during parsing.
|
||||
@ -154,42 +154,42 @@ public:
|
||||
to do conversion between @ref getinputencoding() "input encoding"
|
||||
and @ref getoutputencoding() "output encoding".
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxEncodingConverter* GetEncodingConverter();
|
||||
wxEncodingConverter* GetEncodingConverter() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if actual font is bold, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFontBold();
|
||||
int GetFontBold() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns actual font face name.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFontFace();
|
||||
wxString GetFontFace() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if actual font is fixed face, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFontFixed();
|
||||
int GetFontFixed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if actual font is italic, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFontItalic();
|
||||
int GetFontItalic() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns actual font size (HTML size varies from -2 to +4)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFontSize();
|
||||
int GetFontSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if actual font is underlined, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFontUnderlined();
|
||||
int GetFontUnderlined() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns input encoding.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontEncoding GetInputEncoding();
|
||||
wxFontEncoding GetInputEncoding() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns actual hypertext link. (This value has a non-empty
|
||||
@ -197,18 +197,18 @@ public:
|
||||
if the parser is between @c A and @c /A tags,
|
||||
wxEmptyString otherwise.)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxHtmlLinkInfo GetLink();
|
||||
const wxHtmlLinkInfo GetLink() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour of hypertext link text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetLinkColor();
|
||||
const wxColour GetLinkColor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns output encoding, i.e. closest match to document's input encoding
|
||||
that is supported by operating system.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontEncoding GetOutputEncoding();
|
||||
wxFontEncoding GetOutputEncoding() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns associated window (wxHtmlWindow). This may be @NULL! (You should always
|
||||
|
@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ public:
|
||||
wxFileSystem::ChangePathTo if you use
|
||||
relative paths for the images or other resources embedded in your HTML.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileSystem GetFileSystem();
|
||||
const wxFileSystem GetFileSystem();
|
||||
wxFileSystem GetFileSystem() const;
|
||||
const wxFileSystem GetFileSystem() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextColour()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectedTextBgColour(const wxColour& colBg);
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectedTextBgColour(const wxColour& colBg) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This virtual function may be overridden to customize the appearance of the
|
||||
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextBgColour(),
|
||||
wxVListBox::SetSelectionBackground, wxSystemSettings::GetColour
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectedTextColour(const wxColour& colFg);
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectedTextColour(const wxColour& colFg) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This method must be implemented in the derived class and should return
|
||||
@ -107,13 +107,13 @@ public:
|
||||
that the returned HTML fragment will render with the same height or else you'll
|
||||
see some artifacts when the user selects an item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString OnGetItem(size_t n);
|
||||
wxString OnGetItem(size_t n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function may be overridden to decorate HTML returned by
|
||||
OnGetItem().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString OnGetItemMarkup(size_t n);
|
||||
wxString OnGetItemMarkup(size_t n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called when the user clicks on hypertext link. Does nothing by default.
|
||||
|
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the URL of the hyperlink where the user has just clicked.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetURL();
|
||||
wxString GetURL() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the URL associated with the event.
|
||||
@ -114,25 +114,25 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the colour used to print the label of the hyperlink when the mouse is
|
||||
over the control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetHoverColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetHoverColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used to print the label when the link has never been clicked
|
||||
before
|
||||
(i.e. the link has not been @e visited) and the mouse is not over the control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetNormalColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetNormalColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the URL associated with the hyperlink.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetURL();
|
||||
wxString GetURL() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the hyperlink has already been clicked by the user at least
|
||||
one time.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetVisited();
|
||||
bool GetVisited() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used to print the label when the mouse is not over the
|
||||
@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and the link has already been clicked before (i.e. the link has been @e
|
||||
visited).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetVisitedColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetVisitedColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the colour used to print the label of the hyperlink when the mouse is over
|
||||
|
@ -184,24 +184,24 @@ public:
|
||||
Gets the colour depth of the icon. A value of 1 indicates a
|
||||
monochrome icon.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDepth();
|
||||
int GetDepth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the height of the icon in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetHeight();
|
||||
int GetHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width of the icon in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if icon data is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an icon from a file or resource.
|
||||
|
@ -52,22 +52,22 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Same as GetIcon( wxSize( size, size ) ).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxIcon GetIcon(const wxSize& size);
|
||||
wxIcon GetIcon(wxCoord size = -1);
|
||||
wxIcon GetIcon(const wxSize& size) const;
|
||||
const wxIcon GetIcon(wxCoord size = -1) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the icon with exactly the given size or @c wxNullIcon if this
|
||||
size is not available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxIcon GetIconOfExactSize(const wxSize& size);
|
||||
wxIcon GetIconOfExactSize(const wxSize& size) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the bundle doesn't contain any icons, @false otherwise (in
|
||||
which case a call to GetIcon() with default
|
||||
parameter should return a valid icon).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty();
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
@ -35,5 +35,5 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns @true if the object is valid, i.e. was properly initialized, and
|
||||
@false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the file extension associated with this handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetExtension();
|
||||
const wxString GetExtension() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
If the image file contains more than one image and the image handler is capable
|
||||
@ -61,17 +61,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the MIME type associated with this handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetMimeType();
|
||||
const wxString GetMimeType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the name of this handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetName();
|
||||
const wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the image type associated with this handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetType();
|
||||
long GetType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads a image from a stream, putting the resulting data into @e image. If the
|
||||
@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns number of colours in the histogram.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned long ComputeHistogram(wxImageHistogram& histogram);
|
||||
unsigned long ComputeHistogram(wxImageHistogram& histogram) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
If the image has alpha channel, this method converts it to mask. All pixels
|
||||
@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Deprecated, use equivalent @ref wxBitmap::ctor "wxBitmap constructor"
|
||||
(which takes wxImage and depth as its arguments) instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap ConvertToBitmap();
|
||||
wxBitmap ConvertToBitmap() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a greyscale version of the image. The returned image uses the luminance
|
||||
@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ public:
|
||||
(R * @e lr) + (G * @e lg) + (B * @e lb).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage ConvertToGreyscale(double lr = 0.299, double lg = 0.587,
|
||||
double lb = 0.114);
|
||||
double lb = 0.114) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns monochromatic version of the image. The returned image has white
|
||||
@ -451,12 +451,12 @@ public:
|
||||
everywhere else.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage ConvertToMono(unsigned char r, unsigned char g,
|
||||
unsigned char b);
|
||||
unsigned char b) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns an identical copy of the image.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage Copy();
|
||||
wxImage Copy() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a fresh image. If @a clear is @true, the new image will be initialized
|
||||
@ -523,14 +523,14 @@ public:
|
||||
does have it, this pointer may be used to directly manipulate the alpha values
|
||||
which are stored as the @ref getdata() RGB ones.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char GetAlpha(int x, int y);
|
||||
unsigned char* GetAlpha();
|
||||
unsigned char GetAlpha(int x, int y) const;
|
||||
const unsigned char * GetAlpha() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the blue intensity at the given coordinate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char GetBlue(int x, int y);
|
||||
unsigned char GetBlue(int x, int y) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the image data as an array. This is most often used when doing
|
||||
@ -543,12 +543,12 @@ public:
|
||||
You should not delete the returned pointer nor pass it to
|
||||
SetData().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char* GetData();
|
||||
unsigned char* GetData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the green intensity at the given coordinate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char GetGreen(int x, int y);
|
||||
unsigned char GetGreen(int x, int y) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the static list of image format handlers.
|
||||
@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the height of the image in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetHeight();
|
||||
int GetHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -733,17 +733,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the blue value of the mask colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char GetMaskBlue();
|
||||
unsigned char GetMaskBlue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the green value of the mask colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char GetMaskGreen();
|
||||
unsigned char GetMaskGreen() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the red value of the mask colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char GetMaskRed();
|
||||
unsigned char GetMaskRed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets a user-defined option. The function is case-insensitive to @e name.
|
||||
@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetOption(), GetOptionInt(), HasOption()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetOption(const wxString& name);
|
||||
wxString GetOption(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets a user-defined option as an integer. The function is case-insensitive to
|
||||
@ -786,14 +786,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetOption(), GetOption()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOptionInt(const wxString& name);
|
||||
int GetOptionInt(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the current mask colour or find a suitable unused colour that could be
|
||||
used as a mask colour. Returns @true if the image currently has a mask.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetOrFindMaskColour(unsigned char r, unsigned char g,
|
||||
unsigned char b);
|
||||
unsigned char b) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the palette associated with the image. Currently the palette is only
|
||||
@ -801,25 +801,25 @@ public:
|
||||
have been modified to set the palette if one exists in the image file (usually
|
||||
256 or less colour images in GIF or PNG format).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxPalette GetPalette();
|
||||
const wxPalette GetPalette() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the red intensity at the given coordinate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned char GetRed(int x, int y);
|
||||
unsigned char GetRed(int x, int y) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a sub image of the current one as long as the rect belongs entirely to
|
||||
the image.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage GetSubImage(const wxRect& rect);
|
||||
wxImage GetSubImage(const wxRect& rect) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width of the image in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor for HSVValue, an object that contains values for hue, saturation
|
||||
@ -840,12 +840,12 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAlpha(), SetAlpha()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasAlpha();
|
||||
bool HasAlpha() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if there is a mask active, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasMask();
|
||||
bool HasMask() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the given option is present. The function is case-insensitive
|
||||
@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetOption(), GetOption(), GetOptionInt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasOption(const wxString& name);
|
||||
bool HasOption(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Initializes the image alpha channel data. It is an error to call it
|
||||
@ -887,14 +887,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if image data is present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the given pixel is transparent, i.e. either has the mask
|
||||
colour if this image has a mask or if this image has alpha channel and alpha
|
||||
value of this pixel is strictly less than @e threshold.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsTransparent(int x, int y, unsigned char threshold = 128);
|
||||
bool IsTransparent(int x, int y, unsigned char threshold = 128) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a mirrored copy of the image. The parameter @e horizontally
|
||||
indicates the orientation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage Mirror(bool horizontally = true);
|
||||
wxImage Mirror(bool horizontally = true) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy the data of the given @a image to the specified position in this image.
|
||||
@ -1162,7 +1162,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a copy of the image rotated 90 degrees in the direction
|
||||
indicated by @e clockwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage Rotate90(bool clockwise = true);
|
||||
wxImage Rotate90(bool clockwise = true) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Rotates the hue of each pixel in the image by @e angle, which is a double in
|
||||
@ -1294,12 +1294,13 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see LoadFile()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SaveFile(const wxString& name, int type);
|
||||
bool SaveFile(const wxString& name, const wxString& mimetype);
|
||||
bool SaveFile(const wxString& name);
|
||||
bool SaveFile(wxOutputStream& stream, int type);
|
||||
bool SaveFile(wxOutputStream& stream,
|
||||
const wxString& mimetype);
|
||||
bool SaveFile(const wxString& name, int type) const;
|
||||
const bool SaveFile(const wxString& name,
|
||||
const wxString& mimetype) const;
|
||||
const bool SaveFile(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
const bool SaveFile(wxOutputStream& stream, int type) const;
|
||||
const bool SaveFile(wxOutputStream& stream,
|
||||
const wxString& mimetype) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -1352,7 +1353,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see Rescale()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage Scale(int width, int height,
|
||||
int quality = wxIMAGE_QUALITY_NORMAL);
|
||||
int quality = wxIMAGE_QUALITY_NORMAL) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -1448,7 +1449,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see Resize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImage Size(const wxSize& size, const wxPoint pos, int red = -1,
|
||||
int green = -1, int blue = -1);
|
||||
int green = -1, int blue = -1) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
@ -147,17 +147,17 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the bitmap corresponding to the given index.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmap(int index);
|
||||
wxBitmap GetBitmap(int index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the icon corresponding to the given index.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxIcon GetIcon(int index);
|
||||
wxIcon GetIcon(int index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of images in the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetImageCount();
|
||||
int GetImageCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the size of the images in the list. Currently, the @a index
|
||||
@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns @true if the function succeeded, @false if it failed (for example,
|
||||
if the image list was not yet initialized).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSize(int index, int& width, int& height);
|
||||
bool GetSize(int index, int& width, int& height) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the image at the given position.
|
||||
|
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
||||
This form is internally used when looking up message catalogs.
|
||||
Compare GetSysName().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetCanonicalName();
|
||||
wxString GetCanonicalName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the header value for header @e header. The search for @a header is case
|
||||
@ -175,14 +175,14 @@ public:
|
||||
The return value is the value of the header if found. Else this will be empty.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetHeaderValue(const wxString& header,
|
||||
const wxString& domain = wxEmptyString);
|
||||
const wxString& domain = wxEmptyString) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns wxLanguage constant of current language.
|
||||
Note that you can call this function only if you used the form of
|
||||
Init() that takes wxLanguage argument.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetLanguage();
|
||||
int GetLanguage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to wxLanguageInfo structure containing information about the
|
||||
@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ public:
|
||||
special meaning if passed as an argument to this function and in this case the
|
||||
result of GetSystemLanguage() is used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxLanguageInfo* GetLanguageInfo(int lang);
|
||||
static wxLanguageInfo* GetLanguageInfo(int lang) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns English name of the given language or empty string if this
|
||||
@ -202,20 +202,20 @@ public:
|
||||
See GetLanguageInfo() for a remark about
|
||||
special meaning of @c wxLANGUAGE_DEFAULT.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetLanguageName(int lang);
|
||||
static wxString GetLanguageName(int lang) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the locale name as passed to the constructor or
|
||||
Init(). This is full, human-readable name,
|
||||
e.g. "English" or "French".
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetLocale();
|
||||
const wxString GetLocale() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current short name for the locale (as given to the constructor or
|
||||
the Init() function).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetName();
|
||||
const wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -241,25 +241,25 @@ public:
|
||||
added later override those added before.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetString(const wxString& origString,
|
||||
const wxString& domain = wxEmptyString);
|
||||
const wxString GetString(const wxString& origString,
|
||||
const wxString& origString2,
|
||||
size_t n,
|
||||
const wxString& domain = NULL);
|
||||
const wxString& domain = wxEmptyString) const;
|
||||
const const wxString& GetString(const wxString& origString,
|
||||
const wxString& origString2,
|
||||
size_t n,
|
||||
const wxString& domain = NULL) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns current platform-specific locale name as passed to setlocale().
|
||||
Compare GetCanonicalName().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetSysName();
|
||||
wxString GetSysName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tries to detect the user's default font encoding.
|
||||
Returns wxFontEncoding value or
|
||||
@b wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM if it couldn't be determined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontEncoding GetSystemEncoding();
|
||||
static wxFontEncoding GetSystemEncoding() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tries to detect the name of the user's default font encoding. This string isn't
|
||||
@ -269,14 +269,14 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a user-readable string value or an empty string if it couldn't be
|
||||
determined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetSystemEncodingName();
|
||||
static wxString GetSystemEncodingName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tries to detect the user's default language setting.
|
||||
Returns wxLanguage value or
|
||||
@b wxLANGUAGE_UNKNOWN if the language-guessing algorithm failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetSystemLanguage();
|
||||
static int GetSystemLanguage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -374,12 +374,12 @@ public:
|
||||
normally corresponds to 'domain' which is more or less the application name.
|
||||
See also: AddCatalog()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsLoaded(const char* domain);
|
||||
bool IsLoaded(const char* domain) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the locale could be set successfully.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
See @ref overview_languagecodes "list of recognized language constants".
|
||||
@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ public:
|
||||
or
|
||||
@false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Currently the following @c _l-functions are available:
|
||||
|
@ -40,31 +40,31 @@ public:
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The button id to report, from 0 to GetNumberButtons() - 1
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetButtonState();
|
||||
bool GetButtonState(unsigned id);
|
||||
int GetButtonState() const;
|
||||
const bool GetButtonState(unsigned id) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the manufacturer id.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetManufacturerId();
|
||||
int GetManufacturerId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the movement threshold, the number of steps outside which the joystick
|
||||
is deemed to have
|
||||
moved.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetMovementThreshold();
|
||||
int GetMovementThreshold() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of axes for this joystick.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberAxes();
|
||||
int GetNumberAxes() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of buttons for this joystick.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberButtons();
|
||||
int GetNumberButtons() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of joysticks currently attached to the computer.
|
||||
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ public:
|
||||
degree units.
|
||||
Returns -1 on error.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPOVCTSPosition();
|
||||
int GetPOVCTSPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the point-of-view position, expressed in continuous, one-hundredth of a
|
||||
@ -84,17 +84,17 @@ public:
|
||||
but limited to return 0, 9000, 18000 or 27000.
|
||||
Returns -1 on error.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPOVPosition();
|
||||
int GetPOVPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum polling frequency.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPollingMax();
|
||||
int GetPollingMax() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minimum polling frequency.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPollingMin();
|
||||
int GetPollingMin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -103,140 +103,140 @@ public:
|
||||
@param axis
|
||||
The joystick axis to report, from 0 to GetNumberAxes() - 1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition();
|
||||
int GetPosition(unsigned axis);
|
||||
wxPoint GetPosition() const;
|
||||
const int GetPosition(unsigned axis) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the product id for the joystick.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetProductId();
|
||||
int GetProductId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the product name for the joystick.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetProductName();
|
||||
wxString GetProductName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum rudder position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRudderMax();
|
||||
int GetRudderMax() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minimum rudder position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRudderMin();
|
||||
int GetRudderMin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the rudder position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRudderPosition();
|
||||
int GetRudderPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum U position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetUMax();
|
||||
int GetUMax() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minimum U position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetUMin();
|
||||
int GetUMin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the position of the fifth axis of the joystick, if it exists.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetUPosition();
|
||||
int GetUPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum V position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetVMax();
|
||||
int GetVMax() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minimum V position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetVMin();
|
||||
int GetVMin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the position of the sixth axis of the joystick, if it exists.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetVPosition();
|
||||
int GetVPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum x position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetXMax();
|
||||
int GetXMax() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minimum x position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetXMin();
|
||||
int GetXMin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum y position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetYMax();
|
||||
int GetYMax() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minimum y position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetYMin();
|
||||
int GetYMin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum z position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetZMax();
|
||||
int GetZMax() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the minimum z position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetZMin();
|
||||
int GetZMin() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the z position of the joystick.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetZPosition();
|
||||
int GetZPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the joystick has a point of view control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasPOV();
|
||||
bool HasPOV() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the joystick point-of-view supports discrete values (centered,
|
||||
forward, backward, left, and right).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasPOV4Dir();
|
||||
bool HasPOV4Dir() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the joystick point-of-view supports continuous degree bearings.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
#define bool HasPOVCTS() /* implementation is private */
|
||||
#define bool HasPOVCTS() const /* implementation is private */
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if there is a rudder attached to the computer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasRudder();
|
||||
bool HasRudder() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the joystick has a U axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasU();
|
||||
bool HasU() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the joystick has a V axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasV();
|
||||
bool HasV() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the joystick has a Z axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasZ();
|
||||
bool HasZ() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the joystick is functioning.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOk();
|
||||
bool IsOk() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Releases the capture set by @b SetCapture.
|
||||
|
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ public:
|
||||
remaining space.
|
||||
This function simply calls LayoutWindow().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LayoutFrame(wxFrame* frame, wxWindow* mainWindow = NULL);
|
||||
bool LayoutFrame(wxFrame* frame, wxWindow* mainWindow = NULL) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Lays out the children of an MDI parent frame. If @a rect is non-@NULL, the
|
||||
@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ public:
|
||||
area.
|
||||
The MDI client window is set to occupy the remaining space.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LayoutMDIFrame(wxMDIParentFrame* frame, wxRect* rect = NULL);
|
||||
bool LayoutMDIFrame(wxMDIParentFrame* frame, wxRect* rect = NULL) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Lays out the children of a normal frame or other window.
|
||||
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ public:
|
||||
and the window will be set
|
||||
to the remaining size).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LayoutWindow(wxWindow* parent, wxWindow* mainWindow = NULL);
|
||||
bool LayoutWindow(wxWindow* parent, wxWindow* mainWindow = NULL) const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -223,13 +223,13 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the alignment of the window: one of wxLAYOUT_TOP, wxLAYOUT_LEFT,
|
||||
wxLAYOUT_RIGHT, wxLAYOUT_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLayoutAlignment GetAlignment();
|
||||
wxLayoutAlignment GetAlignment() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the orientation of the window: one of wxLAYOUT_HORIZONTAL,
|
||||
wxLAYOUT_VERTICAL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLayoutOrientation GetOrientation();
|
||||
wxLayoutOrientation GetOrientation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The default handler for the event that is generated by wxLayoutAlgorithm. The
|
||||
@ -305,32 +305,32 @@ public:
|
||||
the window sticks to). One of wxLAYOUT_TOP, wxLAYOUT_LEFT, wxLAYOUT_RIGHT,
|
||||
wxLAYOUT_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetAlignment();
|
||||
void GetAlignment() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the flags associated with this event. Not currently used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFlags();
|
||||
int GetFlags() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the orientation that the event handler specified to the event object.
|
||||
May be one of wxLAYOUT_HORIZONTAL,
|
||||
wxLAYOUT_VERTICAL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLayoutOrientation GetOrientation();
|
||||
wxLayoutOrientation GetOrientation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the requested length of the window in the direction of the window
|
||||
orientation. This information
|
||||
is not yet used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRequestedLength();
|
||||
int GetRequestedLength() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the size that the event handler specified to the event object as being
|
||||
the requested size of the window.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetSize();
|
||||
wxSize GetSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Call this to specify the alignment of the window (which side of the remaining
|
||||
@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the flags associated with this event. Not currently used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetFlags();
|
||||
int GetFlags() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Before the event handler is entered, returns the remaining parent client area
|
||||
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ public:
|
||||
parent client rectangle,
|
||||
after the event handler has subtracted the area that its window occupies.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect GetRect();
|
||||
wxRect GetRect() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the flags associated with this event. Not currently used.
|
||||
|
@ -96,28 +96,28 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the iterator refering to @a object or @NULL if none found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Find(T* object);
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Find(T* object) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of elements in the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t GetCount();
|
||||
size_t GetCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the first iterator in the list (@NULL if the list is empty).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator GetFirst();
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator GetFirst() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the last iterator in the list (@NULL if the list is empty).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator GetLast();
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator GetLast() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of @a obj within the list or @c wxNOT_FOUND if
|
||||
@a obj is not found in the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int IndexOf(T* obj);
|
||||
int IndexOf(T* obj) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -133,18 +133,18 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the list is empty, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty();
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the iterator refering to the object at the given
|
||||
@c index in the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Item(size_t index);
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Item(size_t index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@b NB: This function is deprecated, use wxList::Find instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Member(T* object);
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Member(T* object) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@b NB: This function is deprecated, use @ref wxList::itemfunc Item instead.
|
||||
@ -152,13 +152,13 @@ public:
|
||||
empty
|
||||
or the nth node could not be found).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Nth(int n);
|
||||
wxListT::compatibility_iterator Nth(int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@b NB: This function is deprecated, use wxList::GetCount instead.
|
||||
Returns the number of elements in the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Number();
|
||||
int Number() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Allows the sorting of arbitrary lists by giving a function to compare
|
||||
@ -179,16 +179,16 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the last item of the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
reference back();
|
||||
const_reference back();
|
||||
reference back() const;
|
||||
const_reference back() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a (const) iterator pointing to the beginning of the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
iterator begin();
|
||||
const_iterator begin();
|
||||
iterator begin() const;
|
||||
const_iterator begin() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -199,14 +199,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @e @true if the list is empty.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
bool empty() const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a (const) iterator pointing at the end of the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
iterator end();
|
||||
const_iterator end();
|
||||
iterator end() const;
|
||||
const_iterator end() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -222,8 +222,8 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the first item in the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
reference front();
|
||||
const_reference front();
|
||||
reference front() const;
|
||||
const_reference front() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the largest possible size of the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_type max_size();
|
||||
size_type max_size() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the last item from the list.
|
||||
@ -268,8 +268,8 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a (const) reverse iterator pointing to the beginning of the
|
||||
reversed list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
reverse_iterator rbegin();
|
||||
const_reverse_iterator rbegin();
|
||||
reverse_iterator rbegin() const;
|
||||
const_reverse_iterator rbegin() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -282,8 +282,8 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns a (const) reverse iterator pointing to the end of the
|
||||
reversed list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
reverse_iterator rend();
|
||||
const_reverse_iterator rend();
|
||||
reverse_iterator rend() const;
|
||||
const_reverse_iterator rend() const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the size of the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_type size();
|
||||
size_type size() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -336,12 +336,12 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the client data pointer associated with the node.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
T* GetData();
|
||||
T* GetData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the next node or @NULL if this node is the last one.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxNodeT* GetNext();
|
||||
wxNodeT* GetNext() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the previous node or @NULL if this node is the first one in the list.
|
||||
|
@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see wxControlWithItems::GetSelection, wxControlWithItems::GetStringSelection,
|
||||
wxControlWithItems::SetSelection
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelections(wxArrayInt& selections);
|
||||
int GetSelections(wxArrayInt& selections) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the item located at @e point, or @c wxNOT_FOUND if there
|
||||
@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns Item located at point, or wxNOT_FOUND if unimplemented or the
|
||||
item does not exist.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int HitTest(const wxPoint point);
|
||||
int HitTest(const wxPoint point) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the given item is selected, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSelected(int n);
|
||||
bool IsSelected(int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -237,33 +237,33 @@ public:
|
||||
Gets information about this column. See SetItem() for more
|
||||
information.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetColumn(int col, wxListItem& item);
|
||||
bool GetColumn(int col, wxListItem& item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of columns.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumnCount();
|
||||
int GetColumnCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the column number by visual order index (report view only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumnIndexFromOrder(int order);
|
||||
int GetColumnIndexFromOrder(int order) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the column visual order index (valid in report view only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumnOrder(int col);
|
||||
int GetColumnOrder(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the column width (report view only).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumnWidth(int col);
|
||||
int GetColumnWidth(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the array containing the orders of all columns. On error, an empty
|
||||
array is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetColumnsOrder();
|
||||
wxArrayInt GetColumnsOrder() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the number of items that can fit vertically in the
|
||||
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ public:
|
||||
or the total number of items in the list control (icon
|
||||
or small icon view).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCountPerPage();
|
||||
int GetCountPerPage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the edit control being currently used to edit a label. Returns @NULL
|
||||
@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@b NB: It is currently only implemented for wxMSW and the generic version,
|
||||
not for the native Mac OS X version.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxTextCtrl* GetEditControl();
|
||||
wxTextCtrl* GetEditControl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the specified image list. @a which may be one of:
|
||||
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
The user-defined state image list (unimplemented).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxImageList* GetImageList(int which);
|
||||
wxImageList* GetImageList(int which) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets information about the item. See SetItem() for more
|
||||
@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ public:
|
||||
You must call @e info.SetId() to the ID of item you're interested in
|
||||
before calling this method.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetItem(wxListItem& info);
|
||||
bool GetItem(wxListItem& info) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour for this item. If the item has no specific colour, returns
|
||||
@ -313,27 +313,27 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetItemTextColour()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetItemBackgroundColour(long item);
|
||||
wxColour GetItemBackgroundColour(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of items in the list control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetItemCount();
|
||||
int GetItemCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the application-defined data associated with this item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetItemData(long item);
|
||||
long GetItemData(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the item's font.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetItemFont(long item);
|
||||
wxFont GetItemFont(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the position of the item, in icon or small icon view.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetItemPosition(long item, wxPoint& pos);
|
||||
bool GetItemPosition(long item, wxPoint& pos) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the rectangle representing the item's size and position, in physical
|
||||
@ -341,25 +341,25 @@ public:
|
||||
@a code is one of wxLIST_RECT_BOUNDS, wxLIST_RECT_ICON, wxLIST_RECT_LABEL.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetItemRect(long item, wxRect& rect,
|
||||
int code = wxLIST_RECT_BOUNDS);
|
||||
int code = wxLIST_RECT_BOUNDS) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the spacing between icons in pixels: horizontal spacing is returned
|
||||
as @c x component of the wxSize object and the vertical
|
||||
spacing as its @c y component.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetItemSpacing();
|
||||
wxSize GetItemSpacing() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the item state. For a list of state flags, see SetItem().
|
||||
The @b stateMask indicates which state flags are of interest.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetItemState(long item, long stateMask);
|
||||
int GetItemState(long item, long stateMask) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the item text for this item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetItemText(long item);
|
||||
wxString GetItemText(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour for this item. If the item has no specific colour, returns
|
||||
@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the current control foreground and items with default colour which, hence, have
|
||||
always the same colour as the control).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetItemTextColour(long item);
|
||||
wxColour GetItemTextColour(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Searches for an item with the given geometry or state, starting from
|
||||
@ -425,12 +425,12 @@ public:
|
||||
The item is selected as part of a cut and paste operation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetNextItem(long item, int geometry = wxLIST_NEXT_ALL,
|
||||
int state = wxLIST_STATE_DONTCARE);
|
||||
int state = wxLIST_STATE_DONTCARE) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of selected items in the list control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelectedItemCount();
|
||||
int GetSelectedItemCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the rectangle representing the size and position, in physical
|
||||
@ -445,18 +445,18 @@ public:
|
||||
This function is new since wxWidgets version 2.7.0
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetSubItemRect(long item, long subItem, wxRect& rect,
|
||||
int code = wxLIST_RECT_BOUNDS);
|
||||
int code = wxLIST_RECT_BOUNDS) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the text colour of the list control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetTextColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the index of the topmost visible item when in
|
||||
list or report view.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetTopItem();
|
||||
long GetTopItem() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the rectangle taken by all items in the control. In other words, if the
|
||||
@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Note that this function only works in the icon and small icon views, not in
|
||||
list or report views (this is a limitation of the native Win32 control).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxRect GetViewRect();
|
||||
wxRect GetViewRect() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Determines which item (if any) is at the specified point,
|
||||
@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ public:
|
||||
commctrl.h of version 4.70 that is provided by Microsoft.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long HitTest(const wxPoint& point, int& flags,
|
||||
long* ptrSubItem);
|
||||
long* ptrSubItem) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see OnGetItemImage(), OnGetItemColumnImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxListItemAttr* OnGetItemAttr(long item);
|
||||
virtual wxListItemAttr* OnGetItemAttr(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Overload this function in the derived class for a control with
|
||||
@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see OnGetItemText(), OnGetItemImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemAttr()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual int OnGetItemColumnImage(long item, long column);
|
||||
virtual int OnGetItemColumnImage(long item, long column) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function must be overloaded in the derived class for a control with
|
||||
@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see OnGetItemText(), OnGetItemColumnImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemAttr()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual int OnGetItemImage(long item);
|
||||
virtual int OnGetItemImage(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function @b must be overloaded in the derived class for a control with
|
||||
@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@see SetItemCount(), OnGetItemImage(),
|
||||
OnGetItemColumnImage(), OnGetItemAttr()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxString OnGetItemText(long item, long column);
|
||||
virtual wxString OnGetItemText(long item, long column) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Redraws the given @e item. This is only useful for the virtual list controls
|
||||
@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ public:
|
||||
once.
|
||||
This function is valid in report view only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetColumnOrder(const wxArrayInt& orders);
|
||||
bool SetColumnOrder(const wxArrayInt& orders) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the image list associated with the control. @a which is one of
|
||||
@ -956,13 +956,13 @@ public:
|
||||
For @c EVT_LIST_CACHE_HINT event only: return the first item which the
|
||||
list control advises us to cache.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetCacheFrom();
|
||||
long GetCacheFrom() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
For @c EVT_LIST_CACHE_HINT event only: return the last item (inclusive)
|
||||
which the list control advises us to cache.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetCacheTo();
|
||||
long GetCacheTo() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The column position: it is only used with @c COL events. For the column
|
||||
@ -970,52 +970,52 @@ public:
|
||||
the column click events it may be -1 if the user clicked in the list control
|
||||
header outside any column.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumn();
|
||||
int GetColumn() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The data.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetData();
|
||||
long GetData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The image.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetImage();
|
||||
int GetImage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The item index.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetIndex();
|
||||
long GetIndex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
An item object, used by some events. See also wxListCtrl::SetItem.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxListItem GetItem();
|
||||
const wxListItem GetItem() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Key code if the event is a keypress event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetKeyCode();
|
||||
int GetKeyCode() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The (new) item label for @c EVT_LIST_END_LABEL_EDIT event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetLabel();
|
||||
const wxString GetLabel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The mask.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetMask();
|
||||
long GetMask() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The position of the mouse pointer if the event is a drag event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPoint GetPoint();
|
||||
wxPoint GetPoint() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetText();
|
||||
const wxString GetText() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This method only makes sense for @c EVT_LIST_END_LABEL_EDIT message
|
||||
@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@ public:
|
||||
the edit and
|
||||
the admittedly rare case when the user wants to rename it to an empty string).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEditCancelled();
|
||||
bool IsEditCancelled() const;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1059,32 +1059,32 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently set background color.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour();
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently set font.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently set text color.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour();
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the currently set background color is valid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour();
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the currently set font is valid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasFont();
|
||||
bool HasFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the currently set text color is valid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasTextColour();
|
||||
bool HasTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets a new background color.
|
||||
@ -1149,14 +1149,14 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The first selected item, if any, -1 otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetFirstSelected();
|
||||
long GetFirstSelected() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the currently focused item or -1 if none.
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsSelected(), Focus()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetFocusedItem();
|
||||
long GetFocusedItem() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Used together with GetFirstSelected() to
|
||||
@ -1165,7 +1165,7 @@ public:
|
||||
@returns Returns the next selected item or -1 if there are no more of
|
||||
them.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetNextSelected(long item);
|
||||
long GetNextSelected(long item) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the item with the given @a index is selected,
|
||||
@ -1173,7 +1173,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFirstSelected(), GetNextSelected()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSelected(long index);
|
||||
bool IsSelected(long index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects or unselects the given item.
|
||||
@ -1226,39 +1226,39 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the alignment for this item. Can be one of
|
||||
wxLIST_FORMAT_LEFT, wxLIST_FORMAT_RIGHT or wxLIST_FORMAT_CENTRE.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxListColumnFormat GetAlign();
|
||||
wxListColumnFormat GetAlign() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the background colour for this item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetBackgroundColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the zero-based column; meaningful only in report mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColumn();
|
||||
int GetColumn() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns client data associated with the control. Please note that
|
||||
client data is associated with the item and not with subitems.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetData();
|
||||
long GetData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the font used to display the item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFont GetFont();
|
||||
wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the zero-based item position.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetId();
|
||||
long GetId() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the zero-based index of the image
|
||||
associated with the item into the image list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetImage();
|
||||
int GetImage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a bit mask indicating which fields of the structure are valid;
|
||||
@ -1288,7 +1288,7 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetFormat is valid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetMask();
|
||||
long GetMask() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a bit field representing the state of the item. Can be any
|
||||
@ -1314,22 +1314,22 @@ public:
|
||||
|
||||
The item is in the cut state. Win32 only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetState();
|
||||
long GetState() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label/header text.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxString GetText();
|
||||
const wxString GetText() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the text colour.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetTextColour();
|
||||
wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Meaningful only for column headers in report mode. Returns the column width.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth();
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the alignment for the item. See also
|
||||
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ public:
|
||||
Returns the associated log frame window. This may be used to position or resize
|
||||
it but use Show() to show or hide it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFrame* GetFrame();
|
||||
wxFrame* GetFrame() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Called if the user closes the window interactively, will not be
|
||||
@ -157,14 +157,14 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the pointer to the previously active log target (which may be @NULL).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLog* GetOldLog();
|
||||
wxLog* GetOldLog() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the messages are passed to the previously active log
|
||||
target (default) or @false if PassMessages()
|
||||
had been called.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPassingMessages();
|
||||
bool IsPassingMessages() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
By default, the log messages are passed to the previously active log target.
|
||||
|
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
||||
or modifying it in place (the second one). Not in wxULongLong.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong Abs();
|
||||
wxLongLong Abs();
|
||||
const wxLongLong& Abs();
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -66,39 +66,39 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the high 32 bits of 64 bit integer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetHi();
|
||||
long GetHi() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the low 32 bits of 64 bit integer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned long GetLo();
|
||||
unsigned long GetLo() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Convert to native long long (only for compilers supporting it)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong_t GetValue();
|
||||
wxLongLong_t GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the value as @c double.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double ToDouble();
|
||||
double ToDouble() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Truncate wxLongLong to long. If the conversion loses data (i.e. the wxLongLong
|
||||
value is outside the range of built-in long type), an assert will be triggered
|
||||
in debug mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long ToLong();
|
||||
long ToLong() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string representation of a wxLongLong.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString ToString();
|
||||
wxString ToString() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds 2 wxLongLongs together and returns the result.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong operator+(const wxLongLong& ll);
|
||||
wxLongLong operator+(const wxLongLong& ll) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Subtracts 2 wxLongLongs and returns the result.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLongLong operator-(const wxLongLong& ll);
|
||||
wxLongLong operator-(const wxLongLong& ll) const;
|
||||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the active MDI child, if there is one.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMDIChildFrame* GetActiveChild();
|
||||
wxMDIChildFrame* GetActiveChild() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This gets the size of the frame 'client area' in pixels.
|
||||
@ -213,28 +213,28 @@ public:
|
||||
@see GetToolBar(), SetToolBar(),
|
||||
wxMDIClientWindow
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void GetClientSize(int* width, int* height);
|
||||
virtual void GetClientSize(int* width, int* height) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the client window.
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnCreateClient()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMDIClientWindow* GetClientWindow();
|
||||
wxMDIClientWindow* GetClientWindow() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the window being used as the toolbar for this frame.
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetToolBar();
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetToolBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current Window menu (added by wxWidgets to the menubar). This
|
||||
function
|
||||
is available under Windows only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenu* GetWindowMenu();
|
||||
wxMenu* GetWindowMenu() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this to return a different kind of client window. If you override this
|
||||
|
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Loading…
Reference in New Issue
Block a user